FCC ID: EOTGPDB Gemini

 

GeminiPD Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 1.41 Preliminary For Internal Use Only The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2000 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. March, 2001 Part no.: 120 20110-141 Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................................................1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ........................................................................................................................................1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................................................1 1.2.1 Features ...................................................................................................................................................1 1.2.2 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................1 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................................2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS .......................................................................................................................................2 Factory Repair.........................................................................................................................................2 1.6 UNPACKING.......................................................................................................................................................2 1.5.1 2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION...........................................................................................................................3 2.1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................3 2.1.2 Location ...................................................................................................................................................3 2.1.3 Cable Path ...............................................................................................................................................3 2.2 WARNINGS ........................................................................................................................................................3 RF Radiation warning .............................................................................................................................3 Interference with vehicular electronics....................................................................................................3 Secure mounting ......................................................................................................................................4 Explosive environments ...........................................................................................................................4 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. ..................................................................................4 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT .................................................................................................................................................4 Recommended tools and supplies ............................................................................................................4 Physical mounting of GeminiPD ...............................................................................................................4 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION...............................................................................................................................5 Electrical requirements............................................................................................................................5 Routing of power cable............................................................................................................................5 2.5 ANTENNA ..........................................................................................................................................................7 Recommended tools and supplies ............................................................................................................7 Planning...................................................................................................................................................7 Antenna Installation.................................................................................................................................8 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. ................................................................................................8 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION............................................................................................................8 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.6. 2.7. 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................................9 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS ....................................................................................................................................9 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE ....................................................................................................................................10 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels..............................................................................................................10 3.2.1 4. WINRIS PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................................11 4.1 OPERATION .....................................................................................................................................................11 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START WINRIS...................................................................................................................11 4.3 WINDOW .........................................................................................................................................................12 4.4 FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................................................................13 4.4.1 Station Reset button...........................................................................................................................13 4.4.2 Configuration to a file ...........................................................................................................................13 Get button.................................................................................................................................................. 13 Get As button............................................................................................................................................. 14 4.4.3 Configuration from a File......................................................................................................................14 Put From button......................................................................................................................................... 14 Special Functions...................................................................................................................................14 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4.3.1 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.4.1 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.3 Banner Field.................................................................................................................................................. 14 Comments ..................................................................................................................................................... 15 Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 15 Test Functions........................................................................................................................................15 DSR signal is High indicator ........................................................................................................................ 15 4.4.5.1 CTS signal is High indicator......................................................................................................................... 16 4.4.5.2 4.4.5.3 Channel Selection ......................................................................................................................................... 16 RSSI & Power Out Indicators .......................................................................................................................................... 16 TXON tests ................................................................................................................................................... 16 4.4.5.5 4.4.5.5.1 Unmodulated Carrier................................................................................................................................ 16 4.4.5.5.2 Modulated Carrier .................................................................................................................................... 17 Ping Button ................................................................................................................................................... 17 Ping addresses............................................................................................................................................... 17 Status Bar ..............................................................................................................................................17 4.4.5.6 4.4.5.7 4.4.6 5. TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING ......................................................................................................19 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED....................................................................................................................................19 5.2 BASIC TESTS ...................................................................................................................................................19 5.3 GPS TEST .......................................................................................................................................................19 6. SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................................................21 FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................................5 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................5 FIGURE 3 - DC POWER CONNECTOR ..............................................................................................................................6 FIGURE 4 - ANTENNA SPACING .......................................................................................................................................7 FIGURE 5 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS.............................................................................................................................9 FIGURE 6 - WINRIS WINDOW .......................................................................................................................................12 FIGURE 7 - SELECT PORT WINDOW ...............................................................................................................................13 FIGURE 8 - SHOW ALL CHANNEL FREQUENCY .............................................................................................................16 PD TABLE 1 - GEMINI LEDS INDICATIONS.....................................................................................................................10 TABLE 2 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS ..............................................................................................................................10 TABLE 3 - CARRIER MODULATION ...............................................................................................................................17 TABLE 4 - KEY LATCH INDICATIONS .............................................................................................................................18 TABLE 5 - TESTS, FULL & HALF CHANNEL UNITS........................................................................................................20 APPENDIX 1 - "OFFICER REQUIRES ASSISTANCE" ALARM FUNCTION ....................................................................23 120 20110-141 ii GeminiPD Installation Guide What's New in this version History Version 1.41, March 2001 Section 2.5 Antenna and Figure 4 Antenna spacing amended to show FCCs RF Exposure Guidelines for increased Duty Cycle. Version 1.40, December 2000 Supporting footnotes for Gemini/PD Lite model (No GPS option) added. Section 3.2, function of DE-9F pin 9 (Aux input) corrected and clarified. Section 4.0, re-written to support the WinRIS program. Section 5.0, Table 5, step 4, values revised. Section 6.0, MIL Specifications limitations note added. Appendix 1, clarification of Officer Requires Assistance alarm function added. Version 1.32, October 2000 Updated UHF units specifications:

- Table 3 "Carrier Modulation"

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications. Version 1.31, August 2000 Introduction of 25.6 Kbps model. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation"

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications.

- Emission designators table added to Section 6 Specifications. Version 1.30, August 2000 120 20110-141 iii GeminiPD Installation Guide Power output specifications for 800MHz model added to section 1.2.1 Features. Main transceiver Output Power for 800MHz model added to:

Table 4 Tests, Full and Half Channel Units and minimum value ed-

ited in the footnote. Title of section 4.4.4.2 edited to specify that RSSI Indicator also serves as power meter. Note added to establish that the internal wattmeter is not to be interpreted as a precision instrument. Section 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated Carrier edited to show 800MHz model power check nominal forward wattage. Section 2.4.2 Routing of Power Cable, step no. 7, clarification of negative wire connection. Version 1.20, June 2000:

LED indication explanation for the 800MHz (2% duty cycle limit) model added as a footnote to table 1 and to section 5.3 GPS Test. Section 2.5 Antenna rewritten and now including more details con-

cerning Planning and has a new antenna spacing drawing. More details added to section 4.2 concerning starting of the WinRIS program from MS-Windows. Environmental MIL spec added FCC Certification number added to Specifications section. Version 1.10, March 2000:

Addition of 800MHz specifications, revision to paragraph 2.2.1 - RF Radiation Warning and to paragraphs 2.5 through 2.5.3. Antenna in-

stallation. Version 1.0, January 2000:

First released version 120 20110-141 iv GeminiPD Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU GeminiPD GeminiPD Lite HDX RS-232 Simplex WinRIS Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. GeminiPD Control Unit board High specs mobile radiomodem. PD = Parallel decode GeminiPD without GPS feature Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. A unit which uses the same frequency for transmit and receive. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configuration. 120 20110-141 v GeminiPD Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the installation, operation and verification of the DATARADIO GeminiPD mobile radiomodem. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engi-

neering design, installation, and mainte-

nance personnel. 1.2 General Description GeminiPD is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usu-

ally from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief responses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. The GeminiPD is made-up of a main transceiver and an auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode (PD), a 40-Watt power amplifier (35-Watt for 800 MHz model), a GeminiPD Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem and an optional integrated OEM GPS receiver. *

1.2.1 Features One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology (patent pending) featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Automatic channel changing for im-

proved roaming capabilities. Builtin, up to 16-channel flash EEPROM programmable synthesized radio transceiver with automatic channel selection. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

- DGFSK* modulation, rates of 9600 to 19200 b/s in 12.5 or 25 kHz channel spacing (9600 b/s maxi-

mum in half channels). or

- SRRC4FSK* modulation, rates of 25600 and 19200 b/s in 25 kHz channel spacing. 3 available user ports using standard RS-232 interface via built-in multi-

plexer. Half-duplex or simplex operation. Out-of-band signaling enables transmis-

sion of GPS* reports with no effect on system performance. Back-compatible with MobilPac/R

(DGFSK)* at 9600 and 19200 b/s. 1.2.2 Configuration GeminiPD is factory configured based on each customer network system require-

ments, usually by Dataradio System Engi-

neering. Configuration is not changeable in the field without notifying Dataradio.

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 120 20110-141 1 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is not field serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Spe-

cialized equipment and training is required to repair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service in-

formation before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may sug-

gest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact per-

son who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Informa-

tion about these charges is available from Technical Support. 1.6 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully un-

pack your GeminiPD kit (p/n 023 6000-001) shipping carton and identify each item as listed below:

One GeminiPD Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Installation mounting bracket 120 20110-141 2 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum position for GeminiPD and its antennas as well as the routing of all associ-

ated cabling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the GeminiPD unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna DE-9 connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling GeminiPD is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, win-

dows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that material can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of someone bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (ex-

haust pipes, mufflers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automo-

bile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive com-

puter modules, other electronic modules and these components and ignition circuits to help prevent interference between radio equipment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and be-

low or beneath the doors, channels through doors and window columns that are con-

venient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning The Federal Communications Commission

(FCC), with its action in the General Docket, 79-144, March 13, 1985, has adopted a safety standard for the human ex-

posure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC-regulated equip-

ment. Only proper installation of the trans-

ceiver antenna of GeminiPD as summarized in section 2.5 will result in user exposure substantially below the FCC recommended limits. Qualified personnel must do all antenna in-

stallations. See paragraph 2.5.2 for recom-

mended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals out-

side the vehicle are within two feet of the antenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protec-

tion from radio frequency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

- Electronic fuel injection systems

- Electronic anti-skid braking systems

- Electronic cruise control systems 120 20110-141 3 GeminiPD Installation Guide If the installation vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform nor-

mally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount GeminiPD securely so that the unit will not break loose in case of an accident or violent maneuvers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

- Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as GeminiPD.

- Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or from the vehicle. Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. GeminiPD installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection As-

sociation Standard NFPA 58 which re-

quires:

Space containing radio equipment shall be isolated by a seal from the space containing the LP-gas container and its fittings.

- Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed ac-

cording the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of meas-

uring forward and reflected power at the operating frequency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of GeminiPD Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting GeminiPD to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the GeminiPD may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. GeminiPD is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid dam-

aging some vital part of the ve-

hicle such as fuel tanks, trans-

mission housing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws the mounting surface prior to in-

stallation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. extend below 120 20110-141 4 GeminiPD Installation Guide After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. Do not overtighten self-

tapping screws. 1. Once you have found a suitable mount-

ing position for GeminiPD, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the position provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 2. Using the installation bracket as a tem-

plate, mark the four locations for drill-

ing (see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a cen-

ter punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting. 6. Securely mount GeminiPD to the in-

stalled bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements GeminiPD is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 15.0A. It will tolerate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system

(mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to iso-

late the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. Warnings:

Application of more than 16.3 VDC will damage GeminiPD and is not covered by the warranty. Always disconnect GeminiPDs DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting

(e.g. when jump starting the ve-

hicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles battery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manufacturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise ex-

treme caution throughout the installation and fit the fuse only when the installa-

tion is complete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power cable consists of three wires attached to 120 20110-141 5 GeminiPD Installation Guide a Packard Electric Weather-Pack con-

nector (DC power Connector). The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to igni-

tion) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) 13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire) GROUND

(Blue wire) C B A SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE) IGNITION

(Small red wire) Figure 3 - DC Power Connector 3. Place this connector at GeminiPDs radio power input location. Do not connect at this time. See paragraph 2.6, Com-

pleting the physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be installed, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Secure the wires at several lo-

cations along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the positive lead at the battery positive terminal. Attach the negative wire at the vehicle end of the battery ground cable. If the negative cable is con-

nected directly to the battery negative terminal, it should be fused in case of failure of the vehicles ground cable. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the connection will be made for switch sensing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have GeminiPD turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ignition key. Connect to Accessory if you wish GeminiPD to be available when the engine is not running, but still de-

pendent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the controlled-side of the ChargeGuard

(remembering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was required, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion com-

pound. Insert the fuse only when installa-

tion is complete and ready to test. 11. At the GeminiPD position, neatly coil cable slack and attach securely. 120 20110-141 6 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2.5 Antenna To meet the FCCs RF Exposure Guide-

lines, the main transmitter antenna must be vehicle-mounted to provide a separation distance of 50 cm or more from all persons and the antenna gain must not exceed 5dB to satisfy RF exposure requirements. MPE 50cm 19.7in. 2.5.1 Recommended tools and 24in. supplies circle cutter hole saw or Mini-UHF Crimp tool socket punch for antenna 5/8

(UHF: 18"/46cm 800MHz: 9"/23cm) R T G Figure 4 - Antenna spacing Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

- Most preferred for all antennas: center-

line of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position.

- Less preferred for receiver antenna:

trunk lid, providing distance to trans-

mitting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed.

- Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fend-

ers, just in back of rear window

- Least preferred, but permissible for re-

ceiver antenna: left or right front fend-

ers, ahead of windshield Note:

Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual inter-

ference especially at higher fre-

quencies. 2.5.2 Planning Referring to Figure 4, GeminiPD commonly uses three separate antennas:

T - Main transceiver -

Constraints are Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE on the drawing) lim-

its of 50 cm (as per see section 2.5 above) and omni-directional factors R - Auxiliary receiver Constraints are the receiver spacing of at least 5/8 (wavelength) from trans-

ceiver antenna and omni-directional re-

quirements G

(GPS)*

Constraints are TX spacing of at least 24-in/60.96 cm from all transmitting antennas and a clear view of the sky.

- Global Positioning System For the optimum antenna spacing at the fre-

quency you are using, consult System Engi-

neering. For installation of ground-plane dependent antennas, the center of the metal surface used for mounting is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas, installation may be close to the edges of the surface.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 120 20110-141 7 GeminiPD Installation Guide Connect DC Power cables connector to GeminiPDs until you hear a click as the two parts snap together. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal op-

eration and to run the Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. 2.7. Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1. Check for proper operation of the GeminiPDs LEDs as per Table 1 in sec-

tion 3.1 2. Using the WinRIS program (described in section 4) and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to con-

firm main antenna installation. 3. Using the WinRIS, check the RF link with a base station that can be heard by using the WinRIS Ping feature (see paragraph 4.4.4.4). or If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial ca-

bles (e.g. RG-223) from each of the se-

lected antenna positions to the position where the GeminiPD unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the con-

nection. 3. At the GeminiPD position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-

UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connector. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-

UHF plug and connect to the left rear of GeminiPD. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of GeminiPD to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS* position below the auxiliary con-

nector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the in-

stallation, tie-wrap together the auxil-

iary and the GPS* antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to correctly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing GeminiPD:

120 20110-141 8 GeminiPD Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver (not installed on GeminiPD Lite model) Two LED indicators Three DE-9F RS232 ports The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS Gemini/PD PWR PGM RX TX PC/SETUP

0 0 0 2

. DEV-3 DEV-2 DEV-1 6.000"

Figure 5 - Front and rear panels 120 20110-141 9 GeminiPD Installation Guide Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications GeminiPD LEDs indications Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) RX / TX Indication PWR Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) Indication Indication RX / TX PWR Red Amber Green Red Slow Red/Gree n Fast Red/Gree n l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S Red Off Off Off Red Red Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state Hardware failure Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress Green*

Normal ready state Off No network activity Amber*

1 Pulse/sec. Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Receiving packets DBA sync allows transmit Amber Receiving packets DBA out-of-sync prevents transmit Red Transmitting

* For 800MHz model (using 25% duty cycle limit) PWR lit Green / Flashing Amber = normal indication (GPS 1pulse per sec.) PWR lit Amber / Flashing Green = exceeded duty cycle (GPS 1pps) We recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire ca-

ble with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance & ad-

justment as well to connect user applications. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 2 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term 1 OFF Alternates asserted, spacing dropped, marking Signal level

+3 to +15 V

-3 to -15 V 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports:

DE-9 F pin #

Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD from GeminiPD, normally asserted RXD data from GeminiPD TXD data to GeminiPD DTR to GeminiPD, handshaking Ground DSR from GeminiPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to GeminiPD, handshaking CTS from GeminiPD, handshaking AUX - auxiliary input to GeminiPD,

(for port 2: Officer requires assistance Alarm input) It may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external

+12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs. See Appendix A on page 23 for further details. 120 20110-141 10 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4. WinRIS program The Windows Radio Installation Software

(WinRIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot GeminiPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field-configuring units (Re-

quires intervention with technical support). To run the program, you will need:

A PC or portable computer running a 32-bit MS-

Windows application:

Win ME Win2000 Win NT Win 9x Note:

WinRIS does not operate under:

Win CE (embedded in PocketPC) 16-bit Windows 3.x

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most ac-

tions can also be done using keyboard command 4.1 Operation This support program can be run in MS-

Windows mode. DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and failure to run the program alone re-

sults in unexpected transmissions. Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. 4.2 To connect and start WinRIS Connect a suitable 9-conductor straight RS-232 cable, between front-mounted PC/Setup port and the RS-232 port of the PC or portable computer that will be running Gem-

ini.exe program. the units GeminiPDs WinRIS program is available on diskette, Dataradio p/n 980 03392-00n. Refer to the WinRIS Readme.txt file for details on how to set MS-Windows environment, con-

nect, install and run this pro-

gram. In summary, before starting the WinRIS when running MS-Windows, click on Start, then on

"Run". Type the relevant path and variables on the command line (or select by browsing) lead-

ing to:

WinRIS.EXE COM[x], [speed],8,n,1

(where x is the PC COM port to be used) Of course, the executable command may be used alone without any variable added. Click on OK. It is also possible to create a PC desktop short-

cut icon for WinRIS:

Start by right clicking anywhere on the desktop, Select New, Select Shortcut and type the path as detailed above directly on the command line (with or without variables). Click Next, Type in an applicable name for the shortcut icon, Click Next Select an icon (your choice) and Click on Finish. Command line settings override the environment variable, if any. 120 20110-141 11 GeminiPD Installation Guide Figure 6 - WinRIS window 4.3 Window This program uses one main display screen only. Placing the cursor over a Toolbar or Button generates a ScreenTip. Referring to Figure 6, starting from top and moving down to the bot-

tom, the screen display is made up of:

A Menu bar, containing the menu names listed below. They give access to command options. Unavailable commands are shown in light gray color. Shortcut keys are listed whenever available.

! File menu lists the:

- Put From command (Ctrl+O)

- Get command (Ctrl+S)

- Get As command and below a command separator, the:

- Exit command

! Test menu lists the:

- Modulated command

- UnModulated command

! View menu lists the:

- Toolbar checked command

- Status bar checked command

! Help menu lists the:

- Help Topics command and below a command separator, the:

- About WinRIS command A Toolbar row, located immediately below the menu bar containing buttons (each bearing an icon) for commonly used tasks as follows:

! Put From button

! Get button Get As button 120 20110-141 12 GeminiPD Installation Guide and to the right of a bar separator, the:

! About button and the

! Context-sensitive Help button An Indicator and Button bar, located im-

mediately below the Toolbar row, it con-

tains two circular indicators

! DSR signal is High indicator

! CTS signal is High indicator and three buttons for commonly used tasks as follows.

! Station Reset button

! Modulated TXON button

! Unmodulated TXON button A Product field, displays product type be-

ing used after a connection to the product has been established A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, to select and activate a channel. A Test section, with a Ping button and the relevant address field. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or warning windows. 4.4 Functions The WinRIS program is used to:

Save an existing configuration from a unit to a file. Take a configuration from a file and upload it to a unit Check GeminiPD Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.4.1 Station Reset button The Station Reset button is the only button available when first starting the program and is used to initiate the connection process. Press Station Reset. Enter Port and Baud rate information in the Select Port sub-window. Figure 7 - Select Port window Press OK to validate the selection (or Can-

cel to exit back to the main screen). All test buttons and fields are now activated. The Station Reset button is also pressed as a last step after doing a Put From. The Station Reset button causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Station Reset is not required after do-

ing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. Station Reset does not break the connection. 4.4.2 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. Get button 4.4.2.1 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get command or press the Get button on the Toolbar to:

Establish linking 120 20110-141 13 GeminiPD Installation Guide Download and automatically save the con-

nected units configuration setting to a file named with the unit' serial number: The WinRIS status bar will then report All pa-

rameters are successfully retrieved and saved in file [unit' s/n].GM2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Get As button 4.4.2.2 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get As command or press the Get As button on the Toolbar to:

Establish linking Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.gm2 (already selected). Save the connected units operating charac-

teristics (configuration setting) to a file, di-

rectory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are suc-

cessfully retrieved and saved in [filename]. 4.4.3 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a unit is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 4.4.3.1 1- On the menu bar, select File, then the Put Put From button From command or press the Put From button on the Toolbar. 2- In the Open window, locate the drive, di-

rectory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. The status bar reports: [filename] is downloading into unit and up to 30 seconds later displays: All parameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect! . 6- Press the Station Reset button. See section 4.4.1 for details. 4.4.4 Special Functions The following WinRIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the connected unit:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button Banner Field 4.4.4.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmwares used and their version number. Format is:

[serial number]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version #. The serial number portion uniquely identifies the unit. It is a variable length, maximum eight-

character alphabetic string assigned at the time of manufacture. It is identical to the serial num-

ber printed on the label of the unit. This number cannot be changed and is used as part of the on-

air protocol. 120 20110-141 14 GeminiPD Installation Guide Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Dataradio urges you to use external encryption technology (such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES)) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 4.4.5 Test Functions The following WinRIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

DSR signal is High indicator CTS signal is High indicator Channels select Show All Channel Frequencies RSSI Indicator TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Ping Address and Ping button 4.4.5.1 DSR signal is High indicator The Data Set Ready (DSR) indicator light, located on the button bar (leftmost), is an RS-

232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indi-

cates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used requires that DSR be normally asserted. GeminiPD's firmwares resides in flash EPROM and are designed to allow field upgrades. When contacting your supplier, give the full banner string and the version of the WinRIS used. You will find the version number by se-

lecting the Help menu option, then About WinRIS command or pressing the About button on the Toolbar. The Banner field is blank prior to doing a

"Get", "Get As" or "Put From". 4.4.4.2 Comments 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) (customer name, location, etc). 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.4.4.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field will require that the correct password be entered. If none was entered, the field will remain blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. 120 20110-141 15 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4.4.5.2 CTS signal is High indicator The Clear-to-Send (CTS) indicator light, lo-

cated on the button bar (second indicator from the left), is an RS-232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indicates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used re-

quires that CTS be normally asserted. 4.4.5.3 Channel Selection Select the radio channel on which you wish to send a test transmission by clicking the relevant available option button. The program automatically detects which of sixteen channels are present on the connected unit. For each factory-set channel available, the relevant round option button and channel num-

ber is enabled (black). For each unavailable channel, the round option button and channel number appears disabled (grayed-out). Only one channel at a time may be selected. Pressing the Show All Channel Frequencies button opens a sub-window (see Figure 8) list-

ing in tabular form the radio transmitting and receiving frequencies programmed for each available channel(s). To exit this sub-window, press the upper right system box. Figure 8 - Show All Channel Frequency RSSI & Power Out Indicators 4.4.5.4 The Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) bar graph usually displays in twin-columns the rela-

tive strength (in dBm) of an incoming RF signal on the selected channel. The left column indication, labeled "I", shows the transceiver RX signal (rear mini-UHF con-

nector). The right column indication, labeled "II", shows the auxiliary RX signal (front mini-UHF con-

nector). Meter precision is usually better than 3 dBm. This indicator functions as a single column

"Power" (Watt) meter when using either of the test functions: "TXON (Modulated)" or "TXON

(Unmodulated)" with a range of 0 to 60 watts. Precision is usually better than +/-3 watts. Note:

This internal wattmeter is designed for use as reference only and is not a sub-

stitute for a quality external precision measuring instrument. TXON tests 4.4.5.5 TXON test functions are selected by choosing Test from the file menu, then Modulated or UnModulated command or by pressing the relevant button on the Toolbar. Unmodulated Carrier 4.4.5.5.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reverse power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to transmit an unmodulated 20-seconds test signal on the channel selected or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Power check:

1- Connect an in-line power meter between the radio and the antenna. 2- Measure the forward (nominal 40W for UHF model and 35W for 800MHz model) and reflected power levels by powering TX 120 20110-141 16 GeminiPD Installation Guide ON (<5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng.). 4.4.5.5.2 Modulated Carrier Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with 1kHz sinewave, at deviation level that de-

pends on model and network speed:

Table 3 - Carrier Modulation Carrier Modulation Full Channel Network Speed Typical Deviation C R R S K S F 4 K S M G D 25600 19200 19200 16000 9600 4.0 kHz 4.5 kHz 4.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 3.0 kHz Half Channel Network Speed Typical Deviation 9600 2.5 kHz Different modulation types are not interoperable This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to begin transmitting a 20-seconds modulated test signal on the channel or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Ping Button 4.4.5.6 The Ping function checks connectivity by testing the ability of GeminiPD to communicate with the base station by sending a short transmission query and receiving a confirming response. 1- Specify the channel (paragraph 4.4.5.3) and ping address (paragraph 4.4.5.7) 2- Press the Ping button to start ping testing. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during pinging. The program sends a test query and continues transmitting pings at brief intervals. As soon as a Ping test signal is returned from the address selected, the status bar displays:

Ping Successful and pinging stops. If no ping signal is received after 60 sec-

onds, ping testing stops and the status bar displays Ping Failed. Ping addresses 4.4.5.7 Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Ping Address field in two ways:

1. Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126. 2. As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) ad-

dress, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN. The base address is usually: 1. The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

For ParagonPD product:

Ping address is not in AMN or number format or For GeminiPD product:

Ping address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 4.4.6 Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom edge of the WinRIS window. To display or hide the bar, check or uncheck the command in the View menu. The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you navigate using the direc-

tional arrows. This area also shows messages describing actions of toolbar buttons as you de-

press them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button. 120 20110-141 17 GeminiPD Installation Guide Warning and Caution messages appear in pop-

up sub-windows. To close these message boxes, press the ESC key. Three boxes on the right of the status bar indi-

cate which of the following keys are latched down:

Indicator Description CAP NUM SCRL The Caps Lock key is latched down. The Num Lock key is latched down. The Scroll Lock key is latched down. Table 4 - Key latch indications 120 20110-141 18 GeminiPD Installation Guide 5. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in performance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect GeminiPD to the service monitor. 5.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. Link test between Gemini and the base sta-

tion. 6. GPS test (not required on GeminiPD Lite model). Refer to Table 5 for checks 1 to 5. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months Refer to the WinRIS section for function details 5.3 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the GeminiPD front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second.1 This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground posi-

tion solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital volt-

meter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS cable, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short cir-

cuit the GPS antenna is either a passive an-

tenna which is the WRONG type, or a defec-

tive active antenna, replace with a known good active antenna. 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait about three minutes for the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on GeminiPD, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective 120 20110-141 19 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1 Lit green and flashing amber for the 800MHz model un-

der 2% duty cycle limit. Table 5 - Tests, Full & Half Channel Units STEP GeminiPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

ACTION CHECKLIST EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 6 7 8 Power-up LED Sequence Connect and save config Press WinRIS Get button Main transceiver Output Power Press TX (Unmod) Main transceiver Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) TX Deviation Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modu-

lated with a 1 kHz tone. as per Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications as per section 4.4.2 UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts both +10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts (5 watts for 800MHz model) as per customer request

<5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng. Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line watt-

meter 10W in-line watt-

meter Service monitor set to read frequency error Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) 300 Hz SRRC4FSK, Full ch. unit:

25.6 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 19.2 kb/s: 4.5 kHz DGFSK, Full ch. unit:

19.2 and 16 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 9.6 kb/s: 3.0 kHz DGFSK, Half ch. unit:

9.6 kb/s: 2.5 kHz Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. Refer to factory technical support. Check for bad connec-

tions, damaged coax cable, etc. Refer to factory technical support. Refer to factory technical support. RF Link test

"Ping" a base station Ping Successful as per section 4.4.5.6 Check on the WinRIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range (i.e. better than -107dBm) or Refer to factory technical support. Set the service monitor to generate at the levels mentioned below. The carrier generated should be modu-

lated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation of +/- 4.0kHz (full ch.) or +/-2.5kHz (half ch.). Main Receiver RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm Aux Receiver repeat as per step 7

- 70 dBm +/-3

-110 dBm +/-3

-120 dBm +/- 3 WinRIS bar graph same as step 7 WinRIS bar graph Refer to factory technical support. The RSSI checks give a good indication of re-

ceivers' health. Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model) or 35 watts (800MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 120 20110-141 20 GeminiPD Installation Guide 6. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Tx Frequency Rx Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Modes of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector UHF 1 403 - 512 MHz 403 - 512 MHz 1 800 MHz 806 824 MHz (821-824) 851 869 MHz (866-869) 12.5 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Simplex or Half Duplex 16 internally stored 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external 2 & 4 Amp fuse internal

< 550 mA Standby (with auxiliary receiver)

< 15 A 5 MHz typical 7.050 D x 6.000 W x 2.0000 H

< 3.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female GPS RX: SMA female (Not installed for Gemini PD Lite version) Interface connector 3x DE-9F D-subminiature RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Selectivity (25KHz) Selectivity (12.5) Intermodulation Spurious rejection FM hum & noise Conducted spurious

* psophometrically weighted filter

< 0.35 V *

75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 65 dB typical 60 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum

-45 dB typical *

< -57 dBm 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20110-141 21 GeminiPD Installation Guide TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise Attack time Operation Data rates and Modulation type Packet Error Rate

(for < 1% error) UHF = 10-40 watts 800 MHz = 5-35 watts 20% @ full power, 30 secs. max. TX time (subject to FCC MPE limit)

-75 dBc (-38 dBm @10 W) typical 1.5 ppm

-45 dB max (25 kHz)

< 10 ms Simplex/half duplex DGFSK (9600 b/s), (19200 b/s) *

SRRC4FSK (19200 b/s), (25600 b/s) *

better than 112 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel, with P/D (DGFSK)*

better than 110 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK - UHF)*

better than 109 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK 800MHz)*

Dataradio Proprietary DBA Protocol

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. Different types are not on-air compatible DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs RX/TX, PWR Environmental MIL. spec. Environment Categories MIL Spec. 810E Other Low Pressure High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Shock Solar Radiation Rain1 Humidity1 Dust1 Vibration Shock Operations Operations, Storage Operations, Storage Transfer of equipment Heat effects Drip rain Induced, Aggravated Blowing dust Ground Mobile Functional, Bench handling Method 500.3 501.3 502.3 503.3 505.3 506.3 507.3 510.3 514.4 516.4 Procedure II I(A1), II I(C3), II (C1) I(AI,C2) I II II,III I I(8) I,VI IEC IP54 only II IEC IP54 EIA RS-204C Forestry EIA RS-204C FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS FCC IC (DOC) UHF EOTGPDA 773195525A 800 MHz EOTGPDB 773195643A Baud rate EMISSION DESIGNATORS Bit rate 9600 16000 19200 19200 25600 9600 16000 19200 9600 12800 Modulation UHF DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK SRRC4FSK*

SRRC4FSK*

8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID 15K6F1D 800MHz 8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID 15K6FID

* IC Class II permissive change 1 MIL Specification not guaranteed with GeminiPD Lite version. 120 20110-141 22 GeminiPD Installation Guide Appendix 1 - "Officer Requires Assistance" alarm function The contents of this appendix are also available as Technical Instruction Sheet 009 (TIS009), document part number 122 20110-009 dated December 20, 2000. Overview The DTE Port Interface pin 9 (AUX) on DEV-2 is used for the Officer Requires Assistance alarm function. Intended Audience This document is designed for use by System Integrators. Physical Connection This auxiliary input may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It can also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs (debounced for approximately 100 ms). Operation When using GeminiPD or GeminiPD Lite products, activating the Officer Requires Assistance alarm input starts emergency communications:

The modem creates DMP x or y messages. Any other pending message(s) will be failed to avoid delaying the alarm message on account of lower priority traffic and to remove non-emergency messages from duty-cycle manage-

ment (if applicable). In the case of a q message, a D-NAK* will be immediately returned. Base and Channel hunt will take place for the usual number of retries per base (according to configuration) but will cycle forever until D-ACKed* or Reset*. Lack of base DBA synch will not prevent transmission to maximize the chance that a base gets the alarm signal. DBA Freewheel mode will be forced until the alarm is acknowl-

edged.

* For details on DMP terms, refer to DMP 1.5 manual, version 4.0 120 20110-141 23 GeminiPD Installation Guide

 

 

GeminiPD Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 1.42 Preliminary For Internal Use Only The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2000 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. April, 2001 Part no.: 120 20110-142 Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW.....................................................................................................................................1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE..........................................................................................................................................1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................................1 1.2.1 Features....................................................................................................................................................1 1.2.2 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................1 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT..........................................................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY.........................................................................................................................................2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS .........................................................................................................................................2 Factory Repair .........................................................................................................................................2 1.6 UNPACKING........................................................................................................................................................2 1.5.1 2. INSTALLATION..................................................................................................................................................3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................3 2.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................3 2.1.2 Location....................................................................................................................................................3 2.1.3 Cable Path................................................................................................................................................3 2.2 WARNINGS .........................................................................................................................................................3 RF Radiation warning..............................................................................................................................3 Interference with vehicular electronics...................................................................................................3 Secure mounting.......................................................................................................................................4 Explosive environments............................................................................................................................4 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. .................................................................................4 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT...................................................................................................................................................4 Recommended tools and supplies.............................................................................................................4 Physical mounting of GeminiPD................................................................................................................4 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................5 Electrical requirements............................................................................................................................5 Routing of power cable ............................................................................................................................5 2.5 ANTENNA ...........................................................................................................................................................7 Recommended tools and supplies.............................................................................................................7 Planning ...................................................................................................................................................7 Antenna Installation.................................................................................................................................8 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION....................................................................................................8 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION .............................................................................................................8 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.6. 2.7. 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................9 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS......................................................................................................................................9 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE......................................................................................................................................10 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels..............................................................................................................10 3.2.1 4. WINRIS PROGRAM.........................................................................................................................................11 4.1 OPERATION.......................................................................................................................................................11 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START WINRIS ....................................................................................................................11 4.3 WINDOW ..........................................................................................................................................................12 4.4 FUNCTIONS.......................................................................................................................................................13 4.4.1 Station Reset button...........................................................................................................................13 4.4.2 Configuration to a file............................................................................................................................13 Get button..................................................................................................................................... 13 Get As button ................................................................................................................................ 14 4.4.3 Configuration from a File......................................................................................................................14 Put From button ............................................................................................................................ 14 Special Functions ...................................................................................................................................14 Banner Field ..................................................................................................................................... 14 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4.3.1 4.4.4.1 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.3 Comments........................................................................................................................................ 15 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 15 Test Functions ........................................................................................................................................15 DSR signal is High indicator ............................................................................................................... 15 4.4.5.1 CTS signal is High indicator ............................................................................................................... 16 4.4.5.2 Channel Selection.............................................................................................................................. 16 4.4.5.3 RSSI & Power Out Indicators.............................................................................................................................. 16 TXON tests...................................................................................................................................... 16 4.4.5.5 4.4.5.5.1 Unmodulated Carrier..................................................................................................................... 16 4.4.5.5.2 Modulated Carrier......................................................................................................................... 17 Ping Button ...................................................................................................................................... 17 Ping addresses .................................................................................................................................. 17 Status Bar ...............................................................................................................................................17 4.4.5.6 4.4.5.7 4.4.6 5. TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING .......................................................................................................19 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED......................................................................................................................................19 5.2 BASIC TESTS.....................................................................................................................................................19 5.3 GPS TEST.........................................................................................................................................................19 6. SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................................................................................22 FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS......................................................................................................5 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................5 FIGURE 3 - DC POWER CONNECTOR................................................................................................................................6 FIGURE 4 - ANTENNA SPACING ........................................................................................................................................7 FIGURE 5 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS...............................................................................................................................9 FIGURE 6 - WINRIS WINDOW.........................................................................................................................................12 FIGURE 7 - SELECT PORT WINDOW.................................................................................................................................13 FIGURE 8 - SHOW ALL CHANNEL FREQUENCY ...............................................................................................................16 PD TABLE 1 - GEMINI LEDS INDICATIONS ......................................................................................................................10 TABLE 2 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS ................................................................................................................................10 TABLE 3 - CARRIER MODULATION..................................................................................................................................17 TABLE 4 - KEY LATCH INDICATIONS...............................................................................................................................18 TABLE 5 - TESTS, FULL & HALF CHANNEL UNITS ..........................................................................................................20 APPENDIX 1 - "OFFICER REQUIRES ASSISTANCE" ALARM FUNCTION .......................................................................24 120 20110-142 ii GeminiPD Installation Guide What's New in this version History Version 1.42 (Preliminary), April 2001 Following sections are amended to show SRRC4FSK 12.5kHz channel spacing bit rates.

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation

- Table 5 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications Version 1.41, March 2001 Section 2.5 Antenna and Figure 4 Antenna spacing amended to show FCCs RF Exposure Guidelines for increased Duty Cycle. Version 1.40, December 2000 Supporting footnotes for Gemini/PD Lite model (No GPS option) added. Section 3.2, function of DE-9F pin 9 (Aux input) corrected and clari-

fied. Section 4.0, re-written to support the WinRIS program. Section 5.0, Table 5, step 4, values revised. Section 6.0, MIL Specifications limitations note added. Appendix 1, clarification of Officer Requires Assistance alarm function added. Version 1.32, October 2000 Updated UHF units specifications:

- Table 3 "Carrier Modulation"

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications. Version 1.31, August 2000 120 20110-142 iii GeminiPD Installation Guide Introduction of 25.6 Kbps model. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation"

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications.

- Emission designators table added to Section 6 Specifications. Version 1.30, August 2000 Power output specifications for 800MHz model added to section 1.2.1 Features. Main transceiver Output Power for 800MHz model added to:

Table 4 Tests, Full and Half Channel Units and minimum value edited in the footnote. Title of section 4.4.4.2 edited to specify that RSSI Indicator also serves as power meter. Note added to establish that the internal wattmeter is not to be interpreted as a precision instrument. Section 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated Carrier edited to show 800MHz model power check nominal forward wattage. Section 2.4.2 Routing of Power Cable, step no. 7, clarification of negative wire connection. Version 1.20, June 2000:

LED indication explanation for the 800MHz (2% duty cycle limit) model added as a footnote to table 1 and to section 5.3 GPS Test. Section 2.5 Antenna rewritten and now including more details con-

cerning Planning and has a new antenna spacing drawing. More details added to section 4.2 concerning starting of the WinRIS program from MS-Windows. Environmental MIL spec added FCC Certification number added to Specifications section. Version 1.10, March 2000:

Addition of 800MHz specifications, revision to paragraph 2.2.1 - RF Ra-

diation Warning and to paragraphs 2.5 through 2.5.3. Antenna installa-

tion. Version 1.0, January 2000:

First released version 120 20110-142 iv GeminiPD Installation Guide 120 20110-142 v GeminiPD Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU GeminiPD GeminiPD Lite HDX RS-232 Simplex WinRIS Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. GeminiPD Control Unit board High specs mobile radiomodem. PD = Parallel decode GeminiPD without GPS feature Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. A unit which uses the same frequency for transmit and receive. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configuration. 120 20110-142 vi GeminiPD Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information re-

quired for the installation, operation and verification of the DATARADIO GeminiPD mobile radiomodem. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engi-

neering design, installation, and maintenance personnel. 1.2 General Description GeminiPD is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usu-

ally from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief re-

sponses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. The GeminiPD is made-up of a main transceiver and an auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode (PD), a 40-Watt power amplifier (35-Watt for 800 MHz model), a GeminiPD Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem and an optional integrated OEM GPS receiver. *

1.2.1 Features One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology (patent pending) featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer effective throughput. and more retries Automatic channel changing for im-

proved roaming capabilities. Builtin, up to 16-channel flash EEPROM programmable synthesized radio transceiver with automatic channel selection. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

- DGFSK* modulation, rates of 9600 to 19200 b/s in 12.5 or 25 kHz channel spacing (9600 b/s maximum in half channels). or

- SRRC4FSK* modulation, rates of 25600 and 19200 b/s in 25 kHz or 16000 and 14400 b/s in 12.5 kHz channel spacing. 3 available user ports using standard RS-232 interface via built-in multi-

plexer. Half-duplex or simplex operation. Out-of-band signaling enables transmis-

sion of GPS* reports with no effect on system performance. Back-compatible with MobilPac/R

(DGFSK)* at 9600 and 19200 b/s. 1.2.2 Configuration GeminiPD is factory configured based on each customer network system requirements, usually by Dataradio System Engineering. Configuration is not changeable in the field without notifying Dataradio.

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 120 20110-142 1 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is not field serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Spe-

cialized equipment and training is required to repair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service in-

formation before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may sug-

gest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact per-

son who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Informa-

tion about these charges is available from Technical Support. 1.6 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully unpack your GeminiPD kit (p/n 023 6000-001) ship-

ping carton and identify each item as listed below:

One GeminiPD Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Installation mounting bracket 120 20110-142 2 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum position for GeminiPD and its antennas as well as the routing of all associ-

ated cabling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the GeminiPD unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna DE-9 connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling GeminiPD is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, windows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that mate-

rial can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of someone bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (ex-

haust pipes, mufflers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automo-

bile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive com-

puter modules, other electronic modules and ignition circuits to help prevent interference between these components and radio equip-

ment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and below or beneath the doors, channels through doors and window columns that are convenient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning The Federal Communications Commission

(FCC), with its action in the General Docket, 79-144, March 13, 1985, has adopted a safety standard for the human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC-regulated equipment. Only proper installation of the transceiver antenna of GeminiPD as summarized in section 2.5 will result in user exposure substantially below the FCC recommended limits. Qualified personnel must do all antenna in-

stallations. See paragraph 2.5.2 for recom-

mended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals out-

side the vehicle are within two feet of the antenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protec-

tion from radio frequency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

- Electronic fuel injection systems

- Electronic anti-skid braking systems

- Electronic cruise control systems 120 20110-142 3 GeminiPD Installation Guide If the installation vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform nor-

mally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount Gem-

iniPD securely so that the unit will not break loose in case of an accident or violent ma-

neuvers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

- Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as GeminiPD.

- Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or from the vehicle. Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. GeminiPD installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection As-

sociation Standard NFPA 58 which requires:

Space containing radio equipment shall

be isolated by a seal from the space containing the LP-gas container and its fittings.

- Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed ac-

cording the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of meas-

uring forward and reflected power at the operating frequency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of GeminiPD Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting GeminiPD to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the GeminiPD may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. GeminiPD is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid dam-

aging some vital part of the ve-

hicle such as fuel tanks, trans-

mission housing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws the mounting surface prior to in-

stallation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. extend below 120 20110-142 4 GeminiPD Installation Guide Do not overtighten self-

tapping screws. 1. Once you have found a suitable mount-

ing position for GeminiPD, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the position provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements GeminiPD is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 15.0A. It will tolerate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system

(mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to iso-

late the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. 2. Using the installation bracket as a tem-

Warnings:

plate, mark the four locations for drilling

(see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a center punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting. 6. Securely mount GeminiPD to the installed bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. Application of more than 16.3 VDC will damage GeminiPD and is not covered by the warranty. Always disconnect GeminiPDs DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting

(e.g. when jump starting the ve-

hicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles bat-

tery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manu-

facturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise ex-

treme caution throughout the installation and fit the fuse only when the installa-

tion is complete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power ca-

ble consists of three wires attached to a Packard Electric Weather-Pack con-

nector (DC power Connector). 120 20110-142 5 GeminiPD Installation Guide The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to ignition) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) Figure 3 - DC Power Connector 3. Place this connector at GeminiPDs radio power input location. Do not connect at SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE) 13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire) GROUND

(Blue wire) C B A IGNITION

(Small red wire) this time. See paragraph 2.6, Complet-

ing the physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be installed, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Secure the wires at several loca-

tions along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the positive lead at the battery positive terminal. Attach the negative wire at the vehicle end of the battery ground cable. If the negative cable is con-

nected directly to the battery negative terminal, it should be fused in case of failure of the vehicles ground cable. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the connection will be made for switch sensing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have GeminiPD turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ignition key. Connect to Accessory if you wish GeminiPD to be available when the engine is not running, but still de-

pendent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the con-

trolled-side of the ChargeGuard

(remembering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was required, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion com-

pound. Insert the fuse only when installa-

tion is complete and ready to test. 11. At the GeminiPD position, neatly coil cable slack and attach securely. 120 20110-142 6 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2.5 Antenna To meet the FCCs RF Exposure Guidelines, the main transmitter antenna must be vehicle-

mounted to provide a separation distance of 50 cm or more from all persons and the an-

tenna gain must not exceed 5dB to satisfy RF exposure requirements. MPE 50cm 19.7in. 2.5.1 Recommended tools and 24in. supplies circle cutter hole saw or Mini-UHF Crimp tool socket punch for antenna 5/8

(UHF: 18"/46cm 800MHz: 9"/23cm) R T G Figure 4 - Antenna spacing Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

- Most preferred for all antennas: center-

line of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position.

- Less preferred for receiver antenna:

trunk lid, providing distance to transmit-

ting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed.

- Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fend-

ers, just in back of rear window

- Least preferred, but permissible for re-

ceiver antenna: left or right front fenders, ahead of windshield Note:

Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual inter-

ference especially at higher fre-

quencies. 2.5.2 Planning Referring to Figure 4, GeminiPD commonly uses three separate antennas:

T - Main transceiver -

Constraints are Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE on the drawing) limits of 50 cm (as per see section 2.5 above) and omni-directional factors R - Auxiliary receiver Constraints are the receiver spacing of at least 5/8 (wavelength) from trans-

ceiver antenna and omni-directional re-

quirements G - Global Positioning System (GPS)*

Constraints are TX spacing of at least 24-in/60.96 cm from all transmitting an-

tennas and a clear view of the sky. For the optimum antenna spacing at the fre-

quency you are using, consult System Engi-

neering. For installation of ground-plane dependent antennas, the center of the metal surface used for mounting is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas, in-

stallation may be close to the edges of the surface.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 120 20110-142 7 GeminiPD Installation Guide Connect DC Power cables connector to GeminiPDs until you hear a click as the two parts snap together. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal op-

eration and to run the Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. 2.7. Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1. Check for proper operation of the GeminiPDs LEDs as per Table 1 in sec-

tion 3.1 2. Using the WinRIS program (described in section 4) and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to con-

firm main antenna installation. 3. Using the WinRIS, check the RF link with a base station that can be heard by using the WinRIS Ping feature (see paragraph 4.4.4.4). or If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial ca-

bles (e.g. RG-223) from each of the se-

lected antenna positions to the position where the GeminiPD unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the con-

nection. 3. At the GeminiPD position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connec-

tor. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-

UHF plug and connect to the left rear of GeminiPD. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of GeminiPD to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS*

position below the auxiliary connector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the in-

stallation, tie-wrap together the auxiliary and the GPS* antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to cor-

rectly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing GeminiPD:

120 20110-142 8 GeminiPD Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver (not installed on GeminiPD Lite model) Two LED indicators Three DE-9F RS232 ports The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS Gemini/PD PWR PGM RX TX PC/SETUP

0 0 0

. 2 DEV-3 DEV-2 DEV-1 6.000"

Figure 5 - Front and rear panels 120 20110-142 9 GeminiPD Installation Guide Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications GeminiPD LEDs indications Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) RX / TX Indication PWR Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) Indication Indication RX / TX PWR Red Amber Green Red Slow Red/Green Fast Red/Green l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S Red Off Off Off Red Red Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state Hardware failure Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress Green*

Normal ready state Off No network activity Amber*

1 Pulse/sec. Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Receiving packets DBA sync allows transmit Amber Receiving packets DBA out-of-sync prevents transmit Red Transmitting

* For 800MHz model (using 25% duty cycle limit) PWR lit Green / Flashing Amber = normal indication (GPS 1pulse per sec.) PWR lit Amber / Flashing Green = exceeded duty cycle (GPS 1pps) We recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire ca-

ble with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance & ad-

justment as well to connect user applications. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 2 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term 1 OFF Alternates asserted, spacing dropped, marking Signal level

+3 to +15 V

-3 to -15 V 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports:

DE-9 F pin #

Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD from GeminiPD, normally asserted RXD data from GeminiPD TXD data to GeminiPD DTR to GeminiPD, handshaking Ground DSR from GeminiPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to GeminiPD, handshaking CTS from GeminiPD, handshaking AUX - auxiliary input to GeminiPD,

(for port 2: Officer requires assistance Alarm input) It may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external

+12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs. See Appendix A on page 24 for further details. 120 20110-142 10 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4. WinRIS program The Windows Radio

(WinRIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot GeminiPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field-configuring units (Re-

Installation Software quires intervention with technical support). To run the program, you will need:

A PC or portable computer running a 32-bit MS-

Windows application:

Win ME Win2000 Win NT Win 9x Note:

WinRIS does not operate under:

Win CE (embedded in PocketPC) 16-bit Windows 3.x

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most actions can also be done using keyboard command 4.1 Operation This support program can be run Windows mode. in MS-

DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and failure to run the program alone results in unexpected transmissions. Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. 4.2 To connect and start WinRIS Connect a suitable 9-conductor straight RS-232 cable, between front-mounted PC/Setup port and the RS-232 port of the PC or portable computer that will be running Gem-

ini.exe program. units the GeminiPDs WinRIS program is available on diskette, Dataradio p/n 980 03392-00n. Refer to the WinRIS Readme.txt file for details on how to set MS-Windows environment, con-

nect, install and run this pro-

gram. In summary, before starting the WinRIS when running MS-Windows, click on Start, then on

"Run". Type the relevant path and variables on the command line (or select by browsing) leading to:

WinRIS.EXE COM[x], [speed],8,n,1

(where x is the PC COM port to be used) Of course, the executable command may be used alone without any variable added. Click on OK. It is also possible to create a PC desktop short-

cut icon for WinRIS:

Start by right clicking anywhere on the desktop, Select New, Select Shortcut and type the path as detailed above directly on the command line (with or without variables). Click Next, Type in an applicable name for the shortcut icon, Click Next Select an icon (your choice) and Click on Finish. Command line settings override the environment variable, if any. 120 20110-142 11 GeminiPD Installation Guide Figure 6 - WinRIS window 4.3 Window This program uses one main display screen only. Placing the cursor over a Toolbar or Button gen-

erates a ScreenTip. Referring to Figure 6, start-

ing from top and moving down to the bottom, the screen display is made up of:

A Menu bar, containing the menu names listed below. They give access to command options. Unavailable commands are shown in light gray color. Shortcut keys are listed whenever available.

! File menu lists the:

- Put From command (Ctrl+O)

- Get command (Ctrl+S)

- Get As command and below a command separator, the:

- Exit command

! Test menu lists the:

- Modulated command

- UnModulated command

! View menu lists the:

- Toolbar checked command

- Status bar checked command

! Help menu lists the:

- Help Topics command and below a command separator, the:

- About WinRIS command A Toolbar row, located immediately below the menu bar containing buttons (each bear-

ing an icon) for commonly used tasks as follows:

! Put From button

! Get button Get As button 120 20110-142 12 GeminiPD Installation Guide and to the right of a bar separator, the:

! About button and the

! Context-sensitive Help button An Indicator and Button bar, located im-

mediately below the Toolbar row, it contains two circular indicators

! DSR signal is High indicator

! CTS signal is High indicator and three buttons for commonly used tasks as follows.

! Station Reset button

! Modulated TXON button

! Unmodulated TXON button A Product field, displays product type be-

ing used after a connection to the product has been established A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, to select and activate a channel. A Test section, with a Ping button and the relevant address field. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or warning windows. 4.4 Functions The WinRIS program is used to:

Save an existing configuration from a unit to a file. Take a configuration from a file and upload it to a unit Check GeminiPD Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.4.1 Station Reset button The Station Reset button is the only button available when first starting the program and is used to initiate the connection process. Press Station Reset. Enter Port and Baud rate information in the Select Port sub-window. Figure 7 - Select Port window Press OK to validate the selection (or Can-

cel to exit back to the main screen). All test buttons and fields are now activated. The Station Reset button is also pressed as a last step after doing a Put From. The Station Reset button causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Station Reset is not required after doing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. Station Reset does not break the connection. 4.4.2 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. Get button 4.4.2.1 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get command or press the Get button on the Tool-

bar to:

Establish linking 120 20110-142 13 GeminiPD Installation Guide Download and automatically save the con-

nected units configuration setting to a file named with the unit' serial number: The WinRIS status bar will then report All pa-

rameters are successfully retrieved and saved in file [unit' s/n].GM2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Get As button 4.4.2.2 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get As command or press the Get As button on the Toolbar to:

Establish linking Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.gm2 (already selected). Save the connected units operating charac-

teristics (configuration setting) to a file, di-

rectory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are suc-

cessfully retrieved and saved in [filename]. 4.4.3 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a unit is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 4.4.3.1 1- On the menu bar, select File, then the Put Put From button From command or press the Put From button on the Toolbar. 2- In the Open window, locate the drive, di-

rectory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. The status bar reports: [filename] is downloading into unit and up to 30 seconds later displays: All parameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect! . 6- Press the Station Reset button. See section 4.4.1 for details. 4.4.4 Special Functions The following WinRIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the connected unit:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button Banner Field 4.4.4.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmwares used and their version number. Format is:

[serial number]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version #. The serial number portion uniquely identifies the unit. It is a variable length, maximum eight-

character alphabetic string assigned at the time of manufacture. It is identical to the serial num-

ber printed on the label of the unit. This number cannot be changed and is used as part of the on-

air protocol. 120 20110-142 14 GeminiPD Installation Guide The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Da-

taradio urges you to use external encryption technology (such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES)) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 4.4.5 Test Functions The following WinRIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

DSR signal is High indicator CTS signal is High indicator Channels select Show All Channel Frequencies RSSI Indicator TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Ping Address and Ping button 4.4.5.1 DSR signal is High indicator The Data Set Ready (DSR) indicator light, located on the button bar (leftmost), is an RS-

232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indi-

cates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used requires that DSR be normally asserted. GeminiPD's firmwares resides in flash EPROM and are designed to allow field upgrades. When contacting your supplier, give the full ban-

ner string and the version of the WinRIS used. You will find the version number by selecting the Help menu option, then About WinRIS command or pressing the About button on the Toolbar. The Banner field is blank prior to doing a

"Get", "Get As" or "Put From". 4.4.4.2 Comments 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) (customer name, location, etc). 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no com-

ment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.4.4.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field will require that the correct password be entered. If none was entered, the field will remain blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. 120 20110-142 15 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4.4.5.2 CTS signal is High indicator The Clear-to-Send (CTS) indicator light, lo-

cated on the button bar (second indicator from the left), is an RS-232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indicates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used re-

quires that CTS be normally asserted. 4.4.5.3 Channel Selection Select the radio channel on which you wish to send a test transmission by clicking the relevant available option button. The program automatically detects which of sixteen channels are present on the connected unit. For each factory-set channel available, the relevant round option button and channel number is enabled (black). For each unavailable channel, the round option button and channel number ap-

pears disabled (grayed-out). Only one channel at a time may be selected. Pressing the Show All Channel Frequencies button opens a sub-window (see Figure 8) listing in tabular form the radio transmitting and re-

ceiving frequencies programmed for each avail-

able channel(s). To exit this sub-window, press the upper right system box. Figure 8 - Show All Channel Frequency RSSI & Power Out Indicators 4.4.5.4 The Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) bar graph usually displays in twin-columns the rela-

tive strength (in dBm) of an incoming RF signal on the selected channel. The left column indication, labeled "I", shows the transceiver RX signal (rear mini-UHF con-

nector). The right column indication, labeled "II", shows the auxiliary RX signal (front mini-UHF connec-

tor). Meter precision is usually better than 3 dBm. This indicator functions as a single column

"Power" (Watt) meter when using either of the test functions: "TXON (Modulated)" or "TXON

(Unmodulated)" with a range of 0 to 60 watts. Precision is usually better than +/-3 watts. Note:

This internal wattmeter is designed for use as reference only and is not a sub-

stitute for a quality external precision measuring instrument. TXON tests 4.4.5.5 TXON test functions are selected by choosing Test from the file menu, then Modulated or UnModulated command or by pressing the relevant button on the Toolbar. Unmodulated Carrier 4.4.5.5.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reverse power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to trans-

mit an unmodulated 20-seconds test signal on the channel selected or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Power check:

1- Connect an in-line power meter between the radio and the antenna. 2- Measure the forward (nominal 40W for UHF model and 35W for 800MHz model) and re-

flected power levels by powering TX ON 120 20110-142 16 GeminiPD Installation Guide

(<5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng.). 4.4.5.5.2 Modulated Carrier Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with 1kHz sinewave, at deviation level that de-

pends on model and network speed:

Table 3 - Carrier Modulation Carrier Modulation Full Channel Network Speed C R R S K S F 4 K S M G D 25600 19200 19200 16000 9600 Typical Deviation 4.01)/3.72) kHz 4.5 kHz 4.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 3.0 kHz Half Channel Network Speed C R R S K S F 4 DGMSK 16000 14400 9600 Typical Deviation 1.91)/2.42) kHz 2.31)/2.72) kHz 2.5 kHz Different modulation types are not interoperable 1) UHF model 2) 800MHz model This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to begin transmitting a 20-seconds modulated test signal on the channel or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Ping Button 4.4.5.6 The Ping function checks connectivity by testing the ability of GeminiPD to communicate with the base station by sending a short transmission query and receiving a confirming response. 1- Specify the channel (paragraph 4.4.5.3) and ping address (paragraph 4.4.5.7) 2- Press the Ping button to start ping testing. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during pinging. The program sends a test query and continues transmitting pings at brief intervals. As soon as a Ping test signal is returned from the address selected, the status bar displays:

Ping Successful and pinging stops. If no ping signal is received after 60 sec-

onds, ping testing stops and the status bar displays Ping Failed. Ping addresses 4.4.5.7 Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Ping Address field in two ways:

1. Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126. 2. As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) ad-

dress, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN. The base address is usually: 1. The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

For ParagonPD product:

Ping address is not in AMN or number format or For GeminiPD product:

Ping address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 4.4.6 Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom edge of the WinRIS window. To display or hide the bar, check or uncheck the command in the View menu. The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you navigate using the direc-

tional arrows. This area also shows messages describing actions of toolbar buttons as you de-

press them, before releasing them. If after 120 20110-142 17 GeminiPD Installation Guide viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button. Warning and Caution messages appear in pop-up sub-windows. To close these message boxes, press the ESC key. Three boxes on the right of the status bar indi-

cate which of the following keys are latched down:

Indicator Description CAP NUM SCRL The Caps Lock key is latched down. The Num Lock key is latched down. The Scroll Lock key is latched down. Table 4 - Key latch indications 120 20110-142 18 GeminiPD Installation Guide 5. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in per-

formance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect GeminiPD to the service monitor. 5.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. Link test between Gemini and the base sta-

tion. 6. GPS test (not required on GeminiPD Lite model). Refer to Table 5 for checks 1 to 5. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months Refer to the WinRIS section for function details 5.3 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the GeminiPD front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second.1 This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground posi-

tion solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital volt-

meter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS cable, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short circuit the GPS antenna is either a passive antenna which is the WRONG type, or a defective active antenna, replace with a known good active antenna. three minutes for 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait the POSITION about ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on GeminiPD, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective 120 20110-142 19 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1 Lit green and flashing amber for the 800MHz model un-

der 2% duty cycle limit. Table 5 - Tests, Full & Half Channel Units CHECKLIST STEP GeminiPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C 1 2 Power-up LED Sequence Connect and save con-

fig Press WinRIS Get button 3 Main transceiver Out-

put Power Press TX (Unmod) 4 Main transceiver Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) 5 Carrier Frequency Er-

ror Press TX (Unmod) 4 TX Deviation Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. as per Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications as per section 4.4.2 UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts both +10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts (5 watts for 800MHz model) as per customer request

<5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng. Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line wattmeter 10W in-line wattmeter Service monitor set to read frequency error Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) 300 Hz SRRC4FSK, Full ch. unit:

25.6 kb/s: 4.0 kHz (UHF) 3.7 kHz (800MHz) 19.2 kb/s: 4.5 kHz SRRC4FSK, Half ch. unit:

16.0 kb/s: 1.9 kHz (UHF) 2.4 kHz (800MHz) 14.4 kb/s: 2.3 kHz (UHF) 2.7 kHz (800MHz) DGFSK, Full ch. unit:

19.2 and 16 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 9.6 kb/s: 3.0 kHz DGFSK, Half ch. unit:

9.6 kb/s: 2.5 kHz Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. Refer to factory technical support. Check for bad connec-

tions, damaged coax cable, etc. Refer to factory technical support. Refer to factory technical support. 5 RF Link test

"Ping" a base station Ping Successful as per section 4.4.5.6 Check on the WinRIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range (i.e. better than -107dBm) or Refer to factory technical support. 6 Set the service monitor to generate at the levels mentioned below. The carrier generated should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation of +/- 4.0kHz (full ch.) or +/-2.5kHz (half ch.). 7 Main Receiver RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm

- 70 dBm +/-3

-110 dBm +/-3

-120 dBm +/- 3 WinRIS bar graph Refer to factory technical support. The RSSI checks give a good indication of re-

ceivers' health. 120 20110-142 20 GeminiPD Installation Guide 8 Aux Receiver repeat as per step 7 same as step 7 WinRIS bar graph Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model) or 35 watts (800MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the trans-

mitter. 120 20110-142 21 GeminiPD Installation Guide 6. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Tx Frequency Rx Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Modes of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector UHF 1 403 - 512 MHz 1 403 - 512 MHz 800 MHz 806 824 MHz (821-824) 851 869 MHz (866-869) 12.5 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Simplex or Half Duplex 16 internally stored 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external 2 & 4 Amp fuse internal

< 550 mA Standby (with auxiliary receiver)

< 15 A 5 MHz typical 7.050 D x 6.000 W x 2.0000 H

< 3.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female Interface connector 3x DE-9F D-subminiature GPS RX: SMA female (Not installed for Gemini PD Lite version) RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Selectivity (25KHz) Selectivity (12.5) Intermodulation Spurious rejection FM hum & noise Conducted spurious

* psophometrically weighted filter

< 0.35 V *

75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 65 dB typical 60 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum

-45 dB typical *

< -57 dBm 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20110-142 22 GeminiPD Installation Guide TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise Attack time Operation Data rates and Modulation type Packet Error Rate

(for < 1% error) UHF = 10-40 watts 800 MHz = 5-35 watts 20% @ full power, 30 secs. max. TX time (subject to FCC MPE limit)

-75 dBc (-38 dBm @10 W) typical 1.5 ppm

-45 dB max (25 kHz)

< 10 ms Simplex/half duplex DGFSK (9600 b/s), (19200 b/s) *

SRRC4FSK (19200 b/s), (25600 b/s) *

better than 112 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel, with P/D (DGFSK)*

Protocol

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. Different types are not on-air compatible better than 110 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK - UHF)*

better than 109 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK 800MHz)*

Dataradio Proprietary DBA DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs RX/TX, PWR Environmental MIL. spec. Environment Categories MIL Spec. 810E Other Low Pressure High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Shock Solar Radiation Rain1 Humidity1 Dust1 Vibration Shock Operations Operations, Storage Operations, Storage Transfer of equipment Heat effects Drip rain Induced, Aggravated Blowing dust Ground Mobile Functional, Bench handling Method 500.3 501.3 502.3 503.3 505.3 506.3 507.3 510.3 514.4 516.4 Procedure II I(A1), II I(C3), II (C1) I(AI,C2) I II II,III I I(8) I,VI IEC IP54 only II IEC IP54 EIA RS-204C Forestry EIA RS-204C FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS FCC IC (DOC) UHF EOTGPDA 773195525A 800 MHz EOTGPDB 773195643A Modulation UHF Baud rate EMISSION DESIGNATORS Bit rate 9600 16000 19200 19200 25600 16000 14400 9600 16000 19200 9600 12800 8000 7200 DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK SRRC4FSK*

SRRC4FSK*

SRRC4FSK*

SRRC4FSK*

8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID 15K6F1D 8K17F1D 8K67F1D 800MHz 8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID 15K6FID 10K0F1D 11K0F1D

* IC Class II permissive change 1 MIL Specification not guaranteed with GeminiPD Lite version. 120 20110-142 23 GeminiPD Installation Guide Appendix 1 - "Officer Requires Assistance" alarm function The contents of this appendix are also available as Technical Instruction Sheet 009 (TIS009), document part number 122 20110-009 dated December 20, 2000. Overview The DTE Port Interface pin 9 (AUX) on DEV-2 is used for the Officer Requires Assistance alarm function. Intended Audience This document is designed for use by System Integrators. Physical Connection This auxiliary input may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It can also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs (debounced for approximately 100 ms). Operation When using GeminiPD or GeminiPD Lite products, activating the Officer Requires Assistance alarm input starts emergency communications:

The modem creates DMP x or y messages. Any other pending message(s) will be failed to avoid delaying the alarm message on account of lower priority traffic and to remove non-emergency messages from duty-cycle management

(if applicable). In the case of a q message, a D-NAK* will be immediately returned. Base and Channel hunt will take place for the usual number of retries per base (according to configuration) but will cycle forever until D-ACKed* or Reset*. Lack of base DBA synch will not prevent transmission to maximize the chance that a base gets the alarm signal. DBA Freewheel mode will be forced until the alarm is acknowledged.

* For details on DMP terms, refer to DMP 1.5 manual, version 4.0 120 20110-142 24 GeminiPD Installation Guide

 

 

GeminiPD Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 1.10 The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2000 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. March 2000 Part no.: 120 20110-110 Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2.1 Features: ................................................................................................................................................. 1 1.2.2 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT........................................................................................................................ 2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY ...................................................................................................................................... 2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................................................................................................... 2 Factory Repair ........................................................................................................................................ 2 1.6 UNPACKING ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 1.5.1 2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................... 3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 3 2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 3 2.1.2 Location .................................................................................................................................................. 3 2.1.3 Cable Path............................................................................................................................................... 3 2.2 WARNINGS........................................................................................................................................................ 3 RF Radiation warning............................................................................................................................. 3 Interference with vehicular electronics................................................................................................... 3 Secure mounting...................................................................................................................................... 4 Explosive environments........................................................................................................................... 4 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. ................................................................................. 4 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT................................................................................................................................................. 4 Recommended tools and supplies............................................................................................................ 4 Physical mounting of GeminiPD............................................................................................................... 4 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................. 5 Electrical requirements ........................................................................................................................... 5 Routing of power cable ........................................................................................................................... 5 2.5 ANTENNA ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 Recommended tools and supplies............................................................................................................ 7 Planning.................................................................................................................................................. 7 Antenna Installation................................................................................................................................ 8 2.6 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION...................................................................................................... 8 2.7 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION................................................................................................................ 8 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4.1 2.4.2 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................... 9 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS ................................................................................................................................... 9 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE ................................................................................................................................... 10 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels ............................................................................................................. 10 3.2.1 4. RIS PROGRAM ............................................................................................................................................... 11 4.1 OPERATION..................................................................................................................................................... 11 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START RIS ......................................................................................................................... 11 4.3 WINDOW......................................................................................................................................................... 12 4.4 FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 4.4.1 Configuration to a file........................................................................................................................... 12 Get button ..................................................................................................................................................13 Get As button .............................................................................................................................................13 4.4.2 Configuration from a File ..................................................................................................................... 13 Put From button .........................................................................................................................................13 Station Reset button...................................................................................................................................13 Special Functions.................................................................................................................................. 14 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4.1.1 4.4.1.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.3.1 4.4.3.2 4.4.3.3 4.4.4.1 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.3 Banner Field and i button ..........................................................................................................................14 Comments......................................................................................................................................................14 Password .......................................................................................................................................................14 Test Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 15 Channel Selection..........................................................................................................................................15 RSSI Indicator...............................................................................................................................................15 TXON tests....................................................................................................................................................15 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated Carrier ................................................................................................................................15 4.4.4.3.2 Modulated Carrier ....................................................................................................................................15 Ping Button ...................................................................................................................................................16 Ping addresses ...............................................................................................................................................16 4.4.4.4 4.4.4.5 5. TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING ..................................................................................................... 17 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ................................................................................................................................... 17 5.2 BASIC TESTS................................................................................................................................................... 17 5.3 GPS TEST....................................................................................................................................................... 17 6. SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 19 FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS.................................................................................................... 5 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................................. 5 FIGURE 3- DC POWER CONNECTOR............................................................................................................................... 6 FIGURE 4 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS ............................................................................................................................ 9 FIGURE 5 - RIS WINDOW.............................................................................................................................................. 12 TABLE 1 - GEMINIPD LEDS INDICATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 10 TABLE 2 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS.............................................................................................................................. 10 TABLE 3 - CARRIER MODULATION............................................................................................................................... 15 TABLE 4 - TESTS, FULL & HALF CHANNEL UNITS ....................................................................................................... 18 120 20110-100 ii GeminiPD Installation Guide What's New in Version 1.0 History March 2000 Version 1.10 Addition of 800MHz specifications, revision to paragraph 2.2.1 - RF Radiation Warning and to paragraphs 2.5 through 2.5.3. Antenna installation. January 2000 Version 1.0: First released version 120 20110-100 iii GeminiPD Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU GeminiPD HDX RS-232 RIS Simplex Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. GeminiPD Control Unit board High specs mobile radiomodem. PD = Parallel decode Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configura-

tion. A unit which uses the same frequency for transmit and receive. 120 20110-100 iv GeminiPD Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the installation, operation and verification of the DATARADIO GeminiPD mobile radiomodem. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engi-

neering design, installation, and mainte-

nance personnel. 1.2 General Description GeminiPD is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usu-

ally from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief responses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. The GeminiPD is made-up of a main transceiver and an auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode (PD), a 40-Watt power amplifier (35-Watt for 800 MHz model), a Gemini Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem and an integrated OEM GPS receiver. 1.2.1 Features:

One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology fea-

turing dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading en-

vironments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Automatic channel changing for im-

proved roaming capabilities. Builtin 16-channel synthesized radio transceiver. Power output of 10W to 40W (software controlled). Data speeds of 9600 to 19200 b/s

(9600 b/s maximum in half channels) 3 available user ports using standard RS-232 interface Half-duplex or simplex operation. Built-in GPS receiver. Out-of-band signaling enables transmis-

sion of GPS reports with no effect on system performance. Back-compatible with MobilPac/R 1.2.2 Configuration GeminiPD is factory configured based on each customer network system require-

ments, usually by Dataradio System Engi-

neering. Configuration is not changeable in the field without notifying Dataradio. 120 20110-100 1 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is not field serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Spe-

cialized equipment and training is required to repair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service in-

formation before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may sug-

gest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact per-

son who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Informa-

tion about these charges is available from Technical Support. 1.6 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully un-

pack your GeminiPD kit (p/n 023 6000-001) shipping carton and identify each item as listed below:

One GeminiPD Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Installation mounting bracket 120 20110-100 2 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum position for GeminiPD and its antennas as well as the routing of all associ-

ated cabling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the GeminiPD unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna DE-9 connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling GeminiPD is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, win-

dows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that material can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of someone bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (ex-

haust pipes, mufflers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automo-

bile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive com-

puter modules, other electronic modules and these components and ignition circuits to help prevent interference between radio equipment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and be-

low or beneath the doors, channels through doors and window columns that are con-

venient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning The Federal Communications Commission

(FCC), with its action in the General Docket, 79-144, March 13, 1985, has adopted a safety standard for the human ex-

posure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC-regulated equip-

ment. Only proper installation of the trans-

ceiver antenna of GeminiPD as summarized in paragraph 2.5 through 2.5.3 will result in user exposure substantially below the FCC recommended limits. Antennas installation must be done by quali-

fied personnel. See paragraph 2.5 for rec-

ommended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals out-

side the vehicle are within two feet of the antenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protec-

tion from radio frequency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

- Electronic fuel injection systems

- Electronic anti-skid braking systems

- Electronic cruise control systems 120 20110-100 3 Gemini/PD Installation Guide If the installation vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform nor-

mally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount GeminiPD securely so that the unit will not break loose in case of an accident or violent maneuvers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

- Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as GeminiPD.

- Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or from the vehicle. Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. GeminiPD installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection As-

sociation Standard NFPA 58 which re-

quires:

Space containing radio equipment shall be isolated by a seal from the space containing the LP-gas container and its fittings.

- Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed ac-

cording the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of meas-

uring forward and reflected power at the operating frequency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of GeminiPD Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting GeminiPD to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the GeminiPD may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. GeminiPD is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid dam-

aging some vital part of the ve-

hicle such as fuel tanks, trans-

mission housing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws the mounting surface prior to in-

stallation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. extend below 120 20110-100 4 Gemini/PD Installation Guide After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. Do not overtighten self-

tapping screws. 1. Once you have found a suitable mount-

ing position for GeminiPD, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the position provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 2. Using the installation bracket as a tem-

plate, mark the four locations for drill-

ing (see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a cen-

ter punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting. 6. Securely mount GeminiPD to the in-

stalled bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements GeminiPD is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 15.0A. It will tolerate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system

(mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to iso-

late the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. Warnings:

Application of more than 16.3 VDC will damage GeminiPD and is not covered by the warranty. Always disconnect GeminiPDs DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting

(e.g. when jump starting the ve-

hicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles battery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manufacturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise ex-

treme caution throughout the installation and fit the fuse only when the installa-

tion is complete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power cable consists of three wires attached to 120 20110-100 5 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the negative wire at the battery ground and the positive lead at the bat-

tery positive. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the connection will be made for switch sensing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have GeminiPD turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ignition key. Connect to Accessory if you wish GeminiPD to be available when the engine is not running, but still de-

pendent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the controlled-side of the ChargeGuard

(remembering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was required, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion com-

pound. Insert the fuse only when installa-

tion is complete and ready to test. 11. At the GeminiPD position, neatly coil cable slack and attach securely. a Packard Electric Weather-Pack con-

nector (DC power Connector). The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to igni-

tion) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) SEAL SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE)

(DO NOT REMOVE) 13.8VDC B+

13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire)

(Fused Red wire) GROUND GROUND

(Blue wire)

(Blue wire) C C B B A A IGNITION IGNITION

(Small red wire)

(Small red wire) Figure 3- DC Power Connector 3. Place this connector at GeminiPDs radio power input location. Do not connect at this time. See paragraph 2.6 Complet-

ing physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be installed, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Secure the wires at several lo-

cations along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. 120 20110-100 6 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 2.5 Antenna To meet the FCCs RF Exposure Guide-

lines, the main transmitter antenna should be installed to ensure a minimum distance between the body of the user or nearby per-

sons and the antenna. To determine the minimum distance, calculate the antenna gain less cable loss and refer to the graph below to identify the required minimum separation distance. 2.5.1 Recommended tools and supplies socket punch for antenna circle cutter hole saw or Mini-UHF Crimp tool 2.5.2 Planning GeminiPD commonly uses three separate an-

tennas:

Main transceiver constraints are MPE limits and omni-directional factors Auxiliary receiver constraints are di-

versity spacing and omni-directional re-

quirements GPS constraints are TX spacing and clear sky view. For ground-plane dependent antennas the center of metal surface is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas installation may be close to the edges of the surface. Follow spacing for TX antenna. Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

- Most preferred for all antennas: center-

line of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position.

- Less preferred for receiver antenna:

trunk lid, providing distance to trans-

mitting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed.

- Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fend-

ers, just in back of rear window

- Least preferred, but permissible for re-

ceiver antenna: left or right front fend-

ers, ahead of windshield Note:

Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual inter-

ference especially at higher fre-

quencies. Max G(dB) vs distance to accomplish MPE limits

) B d

n i a g l l a r e v O

) s s o l e l b a c

n i a g

. t n a

10 8 6 4 2 0

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10 800 MHz 400 MHz(UHF) 20 7.9 30 11.8 40 15.7 50 19.7 60 23.6 70 27.6 80 31.5 90 35.4 100 39.4 distance to Tx antenna (cm/in) 120 20110-100 7 Gemini/PD Installation Guide The auxiliary receiver antenna must be in-

stalled at least 5/8 distant from the trans-

ceiver antenna. The GPS antenna placement requires a fairly unobstructed view of the sky. It must also be at least two feet distant from the transceiver antenna but it may be close to the auxiliary RX antenna. For the optimum antenna spacing at the fre-

quency you are using, consult system engi-

neering. 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial ca-

bles (e.g. RG-223) from each of the se-

lected antenna positions to the position where the GeminiPD unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the con-

nection. 3. At the GeminiPD position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-

UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connector. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-

UHF plug and connect to the left rear of GeminiPD. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of GeminiPD to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS position below the auxiliary connector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the in-

stallation, tie-wrap together the auxil-

iary and the GPS antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to correctly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6 Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing GeminiPD:

Connect DC Power cables connector to GeminiPDs until you hear a click as the two parts snap together. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal op-

eration and to run the Radio Installation Software (RIS) program for testing or trou-

ble-shooting. 2.7 Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1- Check for proper operation of the GeminiPDs LEDs as per Table 1 in sec-

tion 3.1. 2- Using the RIS program (described in section 4), and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to con-

firm main antenna installation. 3- Using the RIS, check the RF link with a base station that can be heard by using the RIS Ping feature. See paragraph 4.4.4.4 or If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages. 120 20110-100 8 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver Two LED indicators Three DE-9F RS232 ports The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS Gemini/PD PWR PGM RX TX PC/SETUP

0 0 0 2

. DEV-3 DEV-2 DEV-1 6.000"

Figure 4 - Front and rear panels 120 20110-100 9 Gemini/PD Installation Guide Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications GeminiPD LEDs indications Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) Indication Indication RX / TX PWR Green Normal ready state Off No network activity Amber 1 Pulse/sec. Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Amber Receiving packets DBA sync allows transmit Receiving packets DBA prevents transmit out-of-sync Red Transmitting We recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire ca-

ble with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance & ad-

justment as well to connect user applications. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 2 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term ON Alternates Signal level asserted, spacing

+3 to +15 V OFF dropped, marking

-3 to -15 V Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) PWR Red Amber Green Red Slow Red/Green Fast Red/Green l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S RX / TX Indication Red Off Off Off Red Red Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state Hardware failure Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports:

DE-9 F pin #

Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD from GeminiPD, normally asserted RXD data from GeminiPD TXD data to GeminiPD DTR to GeminiPD, handshaking Ground DSR from GeminiPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to GeminiPD, handshaking CTS from GeminiPD, handshaking AUX auxiliary input to GeminiPD, panic line input (port 3):

It may be activated by dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. 120 20110-100 10 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 4. RIS program The Radio Installation Software (RIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot GeminiPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field-configuring units (Re-

quires intervention with technical support). To run the program, you will need:

- A PC or portable computer with a 486 class CPU or better. 2 free megabytes of RAM.

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most ac-

tions can also be done using keyboard commands. GeminiPDs RIS program is available on diskette, Dataradio p/n 085 03322-00n. Please refer to the readme.txt file included on the diskette for installation instructions. 4.1 Operation This support program is DOS-based and can be run in MS-Windows MS-DOS mode. DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and failure to run the program alone re-

sults in unexpected transmissions. It has the general look and feel of an MS-

Windows program. Mouse operation is the con-

ventional click, double-click plus click and drag method. Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. Otherwise, the Index List is displayed. 4.2 To connect and start RIS 1- Connect a suitable 9-conductor straight RS-

232 cable, between the units front-mounted PC/Setup port and the RS-232 port of the PC or portable computer that will be run-

ning Gemini.exe program. 2- Check that GeminiPD is ON. 3- To run the Radio Service Software (RIS):

In DOS, change to the directory where the program is installed and type gemini.exe and press ENTER. In WIN 3.x, click on File, then on Run, type the path or browse to select, click on OK to run gemini.exe. In WIN 9x, click on Start, then on Run, type the path or browse to select, click on OK to run gemini.exe. 120 20110-100 11 Gemini/PD Installation Guide Dataradio Radio Installation Program Put From Station Reset Gemini Put Comments Put Password dBm II I Exit Get Get As Banner:

Comments:

Password:

Channels CHAN 1 CHAN 5 CHAN 9 CHAN 13 CHAN 2 CHAN 6 CHAN 10 CHAN 14 CHAN 3 CHAN 7 CHAN 11 CHAN 15 CHAN 4 CHAN 8 CHAN 12 CHAN 16 Show All Channel Frequencies

-133

-125 TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Ping Address:

1 Ping i Figure 5 - RIS window 4.3 Window This program uses one main display screen only. Referring to Figure 5, starting from top and moving down to the bottom, it has:

A Button bar, containing the programs five main commands: Exit, Get, Get As, Put From and Station Reset plus a Product type field. A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, to select and activate a channel. A Test section, containing the TXON and Ping buttons and the relevant address fields. An i square button, that opens up the About window. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or in warning windows. 4.4 Functions The RIS program is used to:

Save an existing configuration from a unit to a file. Take a configuration from a file and upload it to a unit Check GeminiPD Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.4.1 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 120 20110-100 12 Gemini/PD Installation Guide Get button 4.4.1.1 On the button bar, press the Get button to:

Establish linking Download and automatically save the con-

nected units configuration setting to a file named with the unit' serial number: The RIS status bar will then report All parameters are successfully retrieved and saved in file

[unit' s/n].GM2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. All test buttons and fields are now activated. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Get As button 4.4.1.2 On the button bar, press the Get As button to:

Establish linking Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.gm2 (already selected). Save the connected units operating charac-

teristics (configuration setting) to a file, di-

rectory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are suc-

cessfully retrieved and saved in [filename]. All buttons and fields are now activated. 4.4.2 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a unit is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 4.4.2.1 1- On the button bar, press the Put From Put From button button. 2- In the opened File, Put From window, locate the drive, directory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. The status bar reports: [filename] is downloading into unit and up to 30 seconds later displays: All parameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect! . All buttons and fields are now activated. 6- Press the Station Reset button. See the next paragraph for details. Station Reset button 4.4.2.2 Press the Station Reset button as a last step after doing a Put From. The Station Reset button causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Station Reset is not required after do-

ing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. Station Reset does not break the connection. 120 20110-100 13 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 4.4.3 Special Functions The following RIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the con-

nected unit:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button i button Banner Field and i button 4.4.3.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmwares used and their version number. Format is:

[serial number]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version #. The serial number portion uniquely identifies the unit. It is a variable length, maximum eight-

character alphabetic string assigned at the time of manufacture. It is identical to the serial num-

ber printed on the label of the unit. This number cannot be changed and is used as part of the on-

air protocol. Gemini/PD's firmwares resides in flash EPROM and are designed to allow field upgrades. When contacting your supplier, give the full banner string and the version of the RIS used. You will find the version number in the About window. To open it, click the lower left square button (with a lowercase letter i in it). This field is blank prior to doing "Get", "Get As"

or "Put From". Comments 4.4.3.2 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) (customer name, location, etc). 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.4.3.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field will require that the correct password be entered. If none was entered, the field will re-

main blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Dataradio urges you to use external encryption technology (such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES)) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 120 20110-100 14 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 4.4.4 Test Functions The following RIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

Channels select Show All Channel Frequencies RSSI Indicator TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Ping Address and Ping button 4.4.4.1 Channel Selection Select the radio channel on which you wish to send a test transmission by clicking the relevant available option button. The program automatically detects which of sixteen channels are present on the connected unit. For each factory-set channel available, the relevant round option button and channel num-

ber is enabled (black). For each unavailable channel, the round option button and channel number appears disabled (grayed-out). Only one channel at a time may be selected. Pressing the Show All Channel Frequencies button opens a sub-window listing in tabular form the radio frequencies programmed for each available channel(s). RSSI Indicator 4.4.4.2 The Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) bar graph usually displays in twin-columns the rela-

tive strength (in dBm) of an incoming RF signal on the selected channel. The left column indication, labeled "I", shows the transceiver RX signal (rear mini-UHF con-

nector). The right column indication, labeled "II", shows the auxiliary RX signal (front mini-UHF con-

nector). Meter precision is usually better than 3 dBm. This indicator functions as a single column

"Power" (Watt) meter when pressing either of the test buttons: "TXON (Modulated)" or

"TXON (Unmodulated)" with a range of 0 to 60 watts. Precision is usually better than +/-3 watts. 4.4.4.3 TXON tests Unmodulated Carrier 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reverse power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to transmit an unmodulated test signal on the channel selected for 30 seconds or until pressed again. The time remaining to test transmit is displayed on the status bar. The functions of all the other buttons are inoperative during test transmis-

sions. Power check:

1- Connect an in-line power meter between the radio and the antenna. 2- Measure the forward (nominal 40W) and reflected power levels by powering TX ON. Never exceed 1W of reflected power. 4.4.4.3.2 Modulated Carrier Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with 1kHz sinewave, at deviation level that de-

pends on model and network speed:

Table 3 - Carrier Modulation Carrier Modulation Full Channel Network Speed Typical Deviation 19200 16000 9600 4.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 3.0 kHz Half Channel Network Speed Typical Deviation 9600 2.5 kHz 120 20110-100 15 Gemini/PD Installation Guide Ping addresses 4.4.4.5 Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Ping Address field in two ways:

1. Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126. 2. As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) ad-

dress, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN. The base address is usually: 1. The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

Ping address is not in AMN or number format or Ping address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to be-

gin transmitting a modulated test signal on the channel selected for 30 seconds or until pressed again. The time remaining to test transmit is dis-

played on the status bar. The functions of all the other buttons are inoperative during test transmissions. Ping Button 4.4.4.4 The Ping function checks connectivity by testing the ability of Gemini to communicate with the base station by sending a short transmission query and receiving a confirming response. 1- Specify the channel (paragraph 4.4.4.1) and ping address (paragraph 4.4.4.5) 2- Press the Ping button to start ping testing. The time remaining to test transmit is dis-

played on the status bar. The functions of all the other buttons are inoperative during pinging. The program sends a test query and continues transmitting pings at brief intervals. As soon as a Ping test signal is returned from the address selected, the status bar displays:

Ping Successful and pinging stops. If no ping signal is received after 60 sec-

onds, ping testing stops and the status bar displays Ping Failed. 120 20110-100 16 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 5. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in performance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect GeminiPD to the service monitor. 5.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. Link test between Gemini and the base sta-

tion. 6. GPS test Refer to Table 4 for checks 1 to 5. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months Refer to the RIS section for function details 5.3 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the GeminiPD front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second. This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground posi-

tion solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital Volt-

Meter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS cable, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short cir-

cuit the GPS antenna is either a passive an-

tenna which is the WRONG type, or a defec-

tive active antenna, replace with a known good active antenna. 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait about three minutes for the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on GeminiPD, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective 120 20110-100 17 Gemini/PD Installation Guide Table 4 - Tests, Full & Half Channel Units CHECKLIST STEP ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

Gemini units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 6 7 8 Power-up LED Sequence Connect and save config Press RIS Get button Main transceiver Output Power Press TX (Unmod) Main transceiver Reverse Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) TX Deviation Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modu-

lated with a 1 kHz tone. RF Link test

"Ping" a base station as per Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications as per section 4.4.1 UHF: 40 watts

+10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per cus-

tomer request.

<1 W 300 Hz Full channel unit 19.2 and 16 kb/s:

4.0 kHz 9.6 kb/s:

3.0 kHz Half channel unit 9.6 kb/s:

2.5 kHz Tolerance is +5%, -10%

for all bit rates. Ping Successful Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line wattmeter 50W in-line wattmeter Service monitor set to read fre-

quency error Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Refer to factory technical support. check for bad connections, dam-

aged coax cable, etc. Refer to factory technical support. Refer to factory technical support. as per sections 4.4.4.4 Check on the RIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range

(i.e. better than -107dBm) or Refer to factory technical support. Set the service monitor to generate at the levels mentioned below. The carrier generated should be modu-

lated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation of +/- 4.0kHz (full ch.) or +/-2.5kHz (half ch.). Main Receiver RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm Aux Receiver repeat as per step 7

- 70 dBm +/-3

-110 dBm +/-3

-120 dBm +/- 3 RIS bar graph Refer to factory technical support. The RSSI checks give a good indication of receivers' health. same as step 7 RIS bar graph Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 120 20110-100 18 Gemini/PD Installation Guide 6. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Tx Frequency Rx Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Modes of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector Interface connector RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Selectivity (25KHz) Selectivity (12.5) Intermodulation Spurious rejection FM hum & noise Conducted spurious

* psophometrically weighted filter UHF 1 400 - 512 MHz 400 - 512 MHz 1 800 MHz 806 824 MHz (821-824) 851 869 MHz (866-869) 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Simplex or Half Duplex 16 internally stored 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external 2 & 4 Amp fuse internal

< 550 mA Standby (with auxiliary receiver)

< 15 A 5 MHz typical 7.050 D x 6.000 W x 2.0000 H

< 3.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female GPS RX: SMA female 3x DE-9F D-subminiature

< 0.35 V *

75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 65 dB typical 60 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum

-45 dB typical *

< -57 dBm 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20110-100 19 Gemini/PD Installation Guide TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise Attack time MODEM OPERATION Operation Data rates Modulation type Packet Error Rate

(for < 1% error) Protocol UHF = 10-40 watts 800 MHz = 5-35 watts 20% @ full power, 30 seconds maximum transmit time

-75 dBc (-38 dBm @10 W) typical 1.5 ppm

-45 dB max (25 kHz)

< 10 ms Simplex/half duplex 9600 b/s 19200 b/s DRCMSK better than 109 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel, single antenna better than 112 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel, with P/D Dataradio Proprietary DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs RX/TX, PWR FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS UHF FCC EOTGPDA IC (DOC) 773195525A 800 MHz PENDING 773195643A 120 20110-100 20 Gemini/PD Installation Guide

 

 

GeminiPD Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 1.31 Preliminary, for internal use The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2000 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. August 2000 Part no.: 120 20110-131 Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................................................1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ........................................................................................................................................1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................................................1 1.2.1 Features ...................................................................................................................................................1 1.2.2 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................1 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................................2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS .......................................................................................................................................2 Factory Repair.........................................................................................................................................2 1.6 UNPACKING.......................................................................................................................................................2 1.5.1 2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION...........................................................................................................................3 2.1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................3 2.1.2 Location ...................................................................................................................................................3 2.1.3 Cable Path ...............................................................................................................................................3 2.2 WARNINGS ........................................................................................................................................................3 RF Radiation warning .............................................................................................................................3 Interference with vehicular electronics....................................................................................................3 Secure mounting ......................................................................................................................................4 Explosive environments ...........................................................................................................................4 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. ..................................................................................4 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT .................................................................................................................................................4 Recommended tools and supplies ............................................................................................................4 Physical mounting of GeminiPD ...............................................................................................................4 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION...............................................................................................................................5 Electrical requirements............................................................................................................................5 Routing of power cable............................................................................................................................5 2.5 ANTENNA ..........................................................................................................................................................7 Recommended tools and supplies ............................................................................................................7 Planning...................................................................................................................................................7 Antenna Installation.................................................................................................................................7 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. ................................................................................................8 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION............................................................................................................8 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.6. 2.7. 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................................9 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS ....................................................................................................................................9 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE ....................................................................................................................................10 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels..............................................................................................................10 3.2.1 4. RIS PROGRAM................................................................................................................................................11 4.1 OPERATION .....................................................................................................................................................11 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START RIS..........................................................................................................................11 4.3 WINDOW .........................................................................................................................................................12 4.4 FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................................................................12 4.4.1 Configuration to a file ...........................................................................................................................12 Get button.................................................................................................................................................. 13 Get As button............................................................................................................................................. 13 4.4.2 Configuration from a File......................................................................................................................13 Put From button......................................................................................................................................... 13 Station Reset button .................................................................................................................................. 13 Special Functions...................................................................................................................................14 4.4.1.1 4.4.1.2 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.3.1 4.4.3.2 4.4.3.3 4.4.4.1 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.3 Banner Field and i button .......................................................................................................................... 14 Comments ..................................................................................................................................................... 14 Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 14 Test Functions........................................................................................................................................15 Channel Selection ......................................................................................................................................... 15 RSSI Indicator .............................................................................................................................................. 15 TXON tests ................................................................................................................................................... 15 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated Carrier................................................................................................................................ 15 4.4.4.3.2 Modulated Carrier .................................................................................................................................... 16 Ping Button ................................................................................................................................................... 16 Ping addresses............................................................................................................................................... 16 4.4.4.4 4.4.4.5 5. TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING ......................................................................................................17 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED....................................................................................................................................17 5.2 BASIC TESTS ...................................................................................................................................................17 5.3 GPS TEST .......................................................................................................................................................17 6. SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................................................19 FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................................5 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................5 FIGURE 3 - DC POWER CONNECTOR ..............................................................................................................................6 FIGURE 4 - ANTENNA SPACING .......................................................................................................................................7 FIGURE 5 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS.............................................................................................................................9 FIGURE 6 - RIS WINDOW ..............................................................................................................................................12 PD TABLE 1 - GEMINI LEDS INDICATIONS.....................................................................................................................10 TABLE 2 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS ..............................................................................................................................10 TABLE 3 - CARRIER MODULATION ...............................................................................................................................16 TABLE 4 - TESTS, FULL & HALF CHANNEL UNITS........................................................................................................18 120 20110-131 ii GeminiPD Installation Guide What's New in this version History Version 1.31, August 2000 Introduction of 25.6 Kbps model. Relevant changes made to:

Section 1.2.1 Features Table 3 Carrier Modulation Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units Section 6 Specifications. Emission designators table added to Section 6 Specifications. Version 1.30, August 2000 Power output specifications for 800MHz model added to section 1.2.1 Features. Main transceiver Output Power for 800MHz model added to:

Table 4 Tests, Full and Half Channel Units and minimum value ed-

ited in the footnote. Title of section 4.4.4.2 edited to specify that RSSI Indicator also serves as power meter. Note added to establish that the internal wattmeter is not to be interpreted as a precision instrument. Section 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated Carrier edited to show 800MHz model power check nominal forward wattage. Section 2.4.2 Routing of Power Cable, step no. 7, clarification of negative wire connection. Version 1.20, June 2000:

LED indication explanation for the 800MHz (2% duty cycle limit) model added as a footnote to table 1 and to section 5.3 GPS Test. Section 2.5 Antenna rewritten and now including more details con-

cerning Planning and has a new antenna spacing drawing. More details added to section 4.2 concerning starting of the RIS program from MS-Windows. Environmental MIL spec added FCC Certification number added to Specifications section. Version 1.10, March 2000:

120 20110-131 iii GeminiPD Installation Guide Addition of 800MHz specifications, revision to paragraph 2.2.1 - RF Radiation Warning and to paragraphs 2.5 through 2.5.3. Antenna in-

stallation. Version 1.0, January 2000:

First released version 120 20110-131 iv GeminiPD Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU GeminiPD HDX RS-232 RIS Simplex Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. GeminiPD Control Unit board High specs mobile radiomodem. PD = Parallel decode Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configura-

tion. A unit which uses the same frequency for transmit and receive. 120 20110-131 v GeminiPD Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the installation, operation and verification of the DATARADIO GeminiPD mobile radiomodem. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engi-

neering design, installation, and mainte-

nance personnel. 1.2 General Description GeminiPD is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usu-

ally from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief responses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. The GeminiPD is made-up of a main transceiver and an auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode (PD), a 40-Watt power amplifier (35-Watt for 800 MHz model), a GeminiPD Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem and an optional integrated OEM GPS receiver. 1.2.1 Features One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology fea-

turing dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading en-

vironments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Automatic channel changing for im-

proved roaming capabilities. Builtin, up to 16-channel flash EEPROM programmable synthesized radio transceiver with automatic channel selection. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

- DGFSK* modulation, rates of 9600 to 19200 b/s in 12.5 or 25 kHz channel spacing (9600 b/s maxi-

mum in half channels).

- SRRC4FSK* modulation, rates of 25600 and 19200 b/s in 25 kHz channel spacing. 3 available user ports using standard RS-232 interface via built-in multi-

plexer. Half-duplex or simplex operation. Out-of-band signaling enables transmis-

sion of GPS reports with no effect on system performance. Back-compatible with MobilPac/R

(DGFSK)* at 9600 and 19200 b/s. 1.2.2 Configuration GeminiPD is factory configured based on each customer network system require-

ments, usually by Dataradio System Engi-

neering. Configuration is not changeable in the field without notifying Dataradio.

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. 120 20110-131 1 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is not field serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Spe-

cialized equipment and training is required to repair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service in-

formation before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may sug-

gest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact per-

son who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Informa-

tion about these charges is available from Technical Support. 1.6 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully un-

pack your GeminiPD kit (p/n 023 6000-001) shipping carton and identify each item as listed below:

One GeminiPD Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Installation mounting bracket 120 20110-131 2 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum position for GeminiPD and its antennas as well as the routing of all associ-

ated cabling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the GeminiPD unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna DE-9 connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling GeminiPD is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, win-

dows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that material can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of someone bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (ex-

haust pipes, mufflers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automo-

bile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive com-

puter modules, other electronic modules and these components and ignition circuits to help prevent interference between radio equipment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and be-

low or beneath the doors, channels through doors and window columns that are con-

venient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning The Federal Communications Commission

(FCC), with its action in the General Docket, 79-144, March 13, 1985, has adopted a safety standard for the human ex-

posure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC-regulated equip-

ment. Only proper installation of the trans-

ceiver antenna of GeminiPD as summarized in section 2.5 will result in user exposure substantially below the FCC recommended limits. Antennas installation must be done by quali-

fied personnel. See paragraph 2.5.2 for rec-

ommended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals out-

side the vehicle are within two feet of the antenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protec-

tion from radio frequency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

- Electronic fuel injection systems

- Electronic anti-skid braking systems

- Electronic cruise control systems 120 20110-131 3 GeminiPD Installation Guide If the installation vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform nor-

mally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount GeminiPD securely so that the unit will not break loose in case of an accident or violent maneuvers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

- Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as GeminiPD.

- Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or from the vehicle. Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. GeminiPD installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection As-

sociation Standard NFPA 58 which re-

quires:

Space containing radio equipment shall be isolated by a seal from the space containing the LP-gas container and its fittings.

- Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed ac-

cording the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of meas-

uring forward and reflected power at the operating frequency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of GeminiPD Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting GeminiPD to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the GeminiPD may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. GeminiPD is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid dam-

aging some vital part of the ve-

hicle such as fuel tanks, trans-

mission housing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws the mounting surface prior to in-

stallation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. extend below 120 20110-131 4 GeminiPD Installation Guide After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. Do not overtighten self-

tapping screws. 1. Once you have found a suitable mount-

ing position for GeminiPD, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the position provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 2. Using the installation bracket as a tem-

plate, mark the four locations for drill-

ing (see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a cen-

ter punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting. 6. Securely mount GeminiPD to the in-

stalled bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements GeminiPD is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 15.0A. It will tolerate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system

(mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to iso-

late the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. Warnings:

Application of more than 16.3 VDC will damage GeminiPD and is not covered by the warranty. Always disconnect GeminiPDs DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting

(e.g. when jump starting the ve-

hicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles battery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manufacturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise ex-

treme caution throughout the installation and fit the fuse only when the installa-

tion is complete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power cable consists of three wires attached to 120 20110-131 5 GeminiPD Installation Guide a Packard Electric Weather-Pack con-

nector (DC power Connector). The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to igni-

tion) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the positive lead at the battery positive terminal. Attach the negative wire at the vehicle end of the battery ground cable. If the negative cable is connected directly to the battery nega-

tive terminal, it should be fused in case of failure of the vehicles ground cable. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE) 13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire) GROUND

(Blue wire) C B A IGNITION

(Small red wire) Figure 3 - DC Power Connector 3. Place this connector at GeminiPDs radio power input location. Do not connect at this time. See paragraph 2.6, Com-

pleting the physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be installed, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Secure the wires at several lo-

cations along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. connection will be made for switch sensing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have GeminiPD turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ignition key. Connect to Accessory if you wish GeminiPD to be available when the engine is not running, but still de-

pendent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the controlled-side of the ChargeGuard

(remembering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was required, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion com-

pound. Insert the fuse only when installa-

tion is complete and ready to test. 11. At the GeminiPD position, neatly coil cable slack and attach securely. 120 20110-131 6 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2.5 Antenna To meet the FCCs RF Exposure Guide-

lines, the main transmitter antenna must be vehicle-mounted to provide a separation distance of 20 cm or more from all persons and the antenna gain, including cable loss, must not exceed 2.73dBd (4.477dBi) for satisfying RF exposure requirements. 2.5.1 Recommended tools and supplies circle cutter hole saw or Mini-UHF Crimp tool socket punch for antenna 2.5.2 Planning Referring to Figure 4, GeminiPD commonly uses three separate antennas:

T - Main transceiver -

Constraints are Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE on the drawing) lim-

its of 20 cm (as per see section 2.5 above) and omni-directional factors R - Auxiliary receiver Constraints are the receiver spacing of at least 5/8 (wavelength) from trans-

ceiver antenna and omni-directional re-

quirements G - Global Positioning System (GPS) Constraints are TX spacing of at least 24-in/60.96 cm from all transmitting antennas and a clear view of the sky. For the optimum antenna spacing at the fre-

quency you are using, consult System Engi-

neering. For installation of ground-plane dependent antennas, the center of the metal surface used for mounting is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas, installation may be close to the edges of the surface. 5/8

(UHF: 18"/46cm 800MHz: 9"/23cm) R MPE 7.9in. / 20cm 24in. T G Figure 4 - Antenna spacing Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

- Most preferred for all antennas: center-

line of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position.

- Less preferred for receiver antenna:

trunk lid, providing distance to trans-

mitting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed.

- Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fend-

ers, just in back of rear window

- Least preferred, but permissible for re-

ceiver antenna: left or right front fend-

ers, ahead of windshield Note:

Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual inter-

ference especially at higher fre-

quencies. 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial ca-

bles (e.g. RG-223) from each of the se-

lected antenna positions to the position where the GeminiPD unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector 120 20110-131 7 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2.7. Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1. Check for proper operation of the GeminiPDs LEDs as per Table 1 in sec-

tion 3.1 2. Using the RIS program (described in section 4) and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to con-

firm main antenna installation. 3. Using the RIS, check the RF link with a base station that can be heard by using the RIS Ping feature. 4. See paragraph 4.4.4.4 or If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages. for the antenna used and make the con-

nection. 3. At the GeminiPD position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-

UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connector. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-

UHF plug and connect to the left rear of GeminiPD. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of GeminiPD to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS position below the auxiliary connector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the in-

stallation, tie-wrap together the auxil-

iary and the GPS antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to correctly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing GeminiPD:

Connect DC Power cables connector to GeminiPDs until you hear a click as the two parts snap together. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal op-

eration and to run the Radio Installation Software (RIS) program for testing or trou-

ble-shooting. 120 20110-131 8 GeminiPD Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver Two LED indicators Three DE-9F RS232 ports The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS Gemini/PD PWR PGM RX TX PC/SETUP

0 0 0 2

. DEV-3 DEV-2 DEV-1 6.000"

Figure 5 - Front and rear panels 120 20110-131 9 GeminiPD Installation Guide Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) GeminiPD LEDs indications PWR Red Amber Green Red Slow Red/Gre en Fast Red/Gre en l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S RX / TX Indication PWR Indication RX / TX Indication Red Off Off Off Red Red Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state Hardware failure Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress Green*

Normal ready state Off No network activity Amber*

1 Pulse/sec. Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Amber Receiving packets DBA sync allows trans-

mit Receiving packets DBA out-of-sync pre-

vents transmit Red Transmitting

* For 800MHz model (using 2% duty cycle limit) PWR lit Green / Flashing Amber = normal indication (GPS 1pulse per sec.) PWR lit Amber / Flashing Green = exceeded duty cycle (GPS 1pps) 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports:

DE-9 F pin #

Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD from GeminiPD, normally as-

serted RXD data from GeminiPD TXD data to GeminiPD DTR to GeminiPD, handshaking Ground DSR from GeminiPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to GeminiPD, handshaking CTS from GeminiPD, handshaking AUX auxiliary input to GeminiPD, panic line input (port 3):

It may be activated by dry contact pull-

up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. We recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire ca-

ble with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance & ad-

justment as well to connect user applications. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 2 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term 1 OFF Alternates asserted, spacing Signal level

+3 to +15 V dropped, marking

-3 to -15 V 120 20110-131 10 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4. RIS program The Radio Installation Software (RIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot GeminiPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field-configuring units (Re-

quires intervention with technical support). To run the program, you will need:

- A PC or portable computer with a 486 class CPU or better. 2 free megabytes of RAM.

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most ac-

tions can also be done using keyboard commands. 4.1 Operation This support program is DOS-based and can be run in MS-Windows MS-DOS mode. DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and failure to run the program alone re-

sults in unexpected transmissions. It has the general look and feel of an MS-

Windows program. Mouse operation is the con-

ventional click, double-click plus click and drag method. Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. Otherwise, the Index List is displayed. 4.2 To connect and start RIS Connect a suitable 9-conductor straight RS-232 cable, between front-mounted PC/Setup port and the RS-232 port of the PC or portable computer that will be running Gem-

ini.exe program. the units GeminiPDs RIS program is available on disk-

ette, Dataradio p/n 085 03322-00n. Refer to the RIS Readme.txt file for details on how to set MS-Windows environment, con-

nect, install and run this pro-

gram. In summary, before starting the RIS when run-

ning MS-Windows, click on Start, then on

"Run". Type the relevant path and variables on the command line (or select by browsing) lead-

ing to:

MPAC_RIS.EXE COM[x], [speed],8,n,1

(where x is the PC COM port to be used) Of course, the executable command may be used alone without any variable added. Click on OK. It is also possible to create a PC desktop RIS shortcut icon:

Start by right clicking anywhere on the desktop, Select New, Select Shortcut and type the path as detailed above directly on the command line (with or without variables). Click Next, Type in an applicable name for the shortcut icon, Click Next Select an icon (your choice) and Click on Finish. Command line settings override the environment variable, if any. 120 20110-131 11 GeminiPD Installation Guide D atara dio R ad io Installa tion P ro gram E xit G e t G e t A s P ut F ro m S ta tion R e se t G em ini B a n ne r:

C om m e n ts:

P assw ord :

C h a nn e ls C H A N 1 C H A N 5 C H A N 9 C H A N 1 3 P u t C o m m e n ts P ut P assw o rd d B m I II C H A N 2 C H A N 6 C H A N 1 0 C H A N 1 4 C H A N 3 C H A N 7 C H A N 1 1 C H A N 1 5 C H A N 4 C H A N 8 C H A N 1 2 C H A N 1 6 S h ow A ll C h an ne l F req ue n cie s

-13 3

-12 5 T X O N (M o d ula ted ) T X O N (U n m o d ula ted ) P ing A dd re ss:

1 P in g i Figure 6 - RIS window 4.3 Window This program uses one main display screen only. Referring to Figure 6, starting from top and moving down to the bottom, it has:

A Button bar, containing the programs five main commands: Exit, Get, Get As, Put From and Station Reset plus a Product type field. A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, to select and activate a channel. A Test section, containing the TXON and Ping buttons and the relevant address fields. An i square button, that opens up the About window. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or in warning windows. 4.4 Functions The RIS program is used to:

Save an existing configuration from a unit to a file. Take a configuration from a file and upload it to a unit Check GeminiPD Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.4.1 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 120 20110-131 12 GeminiPD Installation Guide Get button 4.4.1.1 On the button bar, press the Get button to:

Establish linking Download and automatically save the con-

nected units configuration setting to a file named with the unit' serial number: The RIS status bar will then report All parameters are successfully retrieved and saved in file

[unit' s/n].GM2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. All test buttons and fields are now activated. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Get As button 4.4.1.2 On the button bar, press the Get As button to:

Establish linking Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.gm2 (already selected). Save the connected units operating charac-

teristics (configuration setting) to a file, di-

rectory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are suc-

cessfully retrieved and saved in [filename]. All buttons and fields are now activated. 4.4.2 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a unit is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 4.4.2.1 1- On the button bar, press the Put From Put From button button. 2- In the opened File, Put From window, locate the drive, directory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. The status bar reports: [filename] is downloading into unit and up to 30 seconds later displays: All parameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect! . All buttons and fields are now activated. 6- Press the Station Reset button. See the next paragraph for details. Station Reset button 4.4.2.2 Press the Station Reset button as a last step after doing a Put From. The Station Reset button causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Station Reset is not required after do-

ing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. Station Reset does not break the connection. 120 20110-131 13 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4.4.3 Special Functions The following RIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the con-

nected unit:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button i button Banner Field and i button 4.4.3.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmwares used and their version number. Format is:

[serial number]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version #. The serial number portion uniquely identifies the unit. It is a variable length, maximum eight-

character alphabetic string assigned at the time of manufacture. It is identical to the serial num-

ber printed on the label of the unit. This number cannot be changed and is used as part of the on-

air protocol. GeminiPD's firmwares resides in flash EPROM and are designed to allow field upgrades. When contacting your supplier, give the full banner string and the version of the RIS used. You will find the version number in the About window. To open it, click the lower left square button (with a lowercase letter i in it). This field is blank prior to doing "Get", "Get As"

or "Put From". Comments 4.4.3.2 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) (customer name, location, etc). 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.4.3.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field will require that the correct password be entered. If none was entered, the field will re-

main blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Dataradio urges you to use external encryption technology (such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES)) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 120 20110-131 14 GeminiPD Installation Guide This indicator functions as a single column

"Power" (Watt) meter when pressing either of the test buttons: "TXON (Modulated)" or

"TXON (Unmodulated)" with a range of 0 to 60 watts. Precision is usually better than +/-3 watts. Note:

This internal wattmeter is designed for use as reference only and is not a sub-

stitute for a quality external precision measuring instrument. 4.4.4.3 TXON tests Unmodulated Carrier 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reverse power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to transmit an unmodulated test signal on the channel selected for 30 seconds or until pressed again. The time remaining to test transmit is displayed on the status bar. The functions of all the other buttons are inoperative during test transmis-

sions. Power check:

1- Connect an in-line power meter between the radio and the antenna. 2- Measure the forward (nominal 40W for UHF model and 35W for 800MHz model) and reflected power levels by powering TX ON. Never exceed 1W of reflected power. 4.4.4 Test Functions The following RIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

Channels select Show All Channel Frequencies RSSI Indicator TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Ping Address and Ping button 4.4.4.1 Channel Selection Select the radio channel on which you wish to send a test transmission by clicking the relevant available option button. The program automatically detects which of sixteen channels are present on the connected unit. For each factory-set channel available, the relevant round option button and channel num-

ber is enabled (black). For each unavailable channel, the round option button and channel number appears disabled (grayed-out). Only one channel at a time may be selected. Pressing the Show All Channel Frequencies button opens a sub-window listing in tabular form the radio frequencies programmed for each available channel(s). 4.4.4.2 RSSI & Power Out Indicators The Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) bar graph usually displays in twin-columns the rela-

tive strength (in dBm) of an incoming RF signal on the selected channel. The left column indication, labeled "I", shows the transceiver RX signal (rear mini-UHF con-

nector). The right column indication, labeled "II", shows the auxiliary RX signal (front mini-UHF con-

nector). Meter precision is usually better than 3 dBm. 120 20110-131 15 GeminiPD Installation Guide the other buttons are inoperative during pinging. The program sends a test query and continues transmitting pings at brief intervals. As soon as a Ping test signal is returned from the address selected, the status bar displays:

Ping Successful and pinging stops. If no ping signal is received after 60 sec-

onds, ping testing stops and the status bar displays Ping Failed. Ping addresses 4.4.4.5 Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Ping Address field in two ways:

1. Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126. 2. As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) ad-

dress, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN. The base address is usually: 1. The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

Ping address is not in AMN or number format or Ping address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 4.4.4.3.2 Modulated Carrier Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with 1kHz sinewave, at deviation level that de-

pends on model and network speed:

Table 3 - Carrier Modulation Carrier Modulation Full Channel Network Speed Typical Deviation K S F 4 C R R S K S M G D 25600 25600 19200 19200 16000 9600 4.8 kHz (UHF) 4.5 kHz (800) 5.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 3.0 kHz Half Channel Network Speed Typical Deviation 9600 2.5 kHz Different modulation types are not interoperable This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to be-

gin transmitting a modulated test signal on the channel selected for 30 seconds or until pressed again. The time remaining to test transmit is dis-

played on the status bar. The functions of all the other buttons are inoperative during test transmissions. Ping Button 4.4.4.4 The Ping function checks connectivity by testing the ability of Gemini to communicate with the base station by sending a short transmission query and receiving a confirming response. 1- Specify the channel (paragraph 4.4.4.1) and ping address (paragraph 4.4.4.5) 2- Press the Ping button to start ping testing. The time remaining to test transmit is dis-

played on the status bar. The functions of all 120 20110-131 16 GeminiPD Installation Guide 5. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in performance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect GeminiPD to the service monitor. 5.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. Link test between Gemini and the base sta-

tion. 6. GPS test Refer to Table 4 for checks 1 to 5. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months Refer to the RIS section for function details 5.3 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the GeminiPD front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second.1 This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground posi-

tion solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital Volt-

Meter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS cable, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short cir-

cuit the GPS antenna is either a passive an-

tenna which is the WRONG type, or a defec-

tive active antenna, replace with a known good active antenna. 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait about three minutes for the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on GeminiPD, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective 1 Lit green and flashing amber for the 800MHz model un-

der 2% duty cycle limit. 120 20110-131 17 GeminiPD Installation Guide Table 4 - Tests, Full & Half Channel Units ACTION STEP GeminiPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to re-

adjust the units. MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

CHECKLIST EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 6 7 8 Power-up LED Sequence Connect and save config Press RIS Get button Main transceiver Output Power Press TX (Unmod) Main transceiver Reverse Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) TX Deviation Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modu-

lated with a 1 kHz tone. as per Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications as per section 4.4.1 Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line watt-

meter 50W in-line watt-

meter Service monitor set to read frequency error Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts both +10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts (5 watts for 800MHz model) as per customer request

<1 W 300 Hz SRRC4FSK, Full ch. unit:

25.6 kb/s: 4.8 kHz (UHF) 25.6 kb/s: 4.5 kHz (800 MHz) 19.2 kb/s: 5.0 kHz DGFSK, Full ch. unit:

19.2 and 16 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 9.6 kb/s: 3.0 kHz DGFSK, Half ch. unit:

9.6 kb/s: 2.5 kHz Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. Refer to factory technical support. check for bad connec-

tions, damaged coax cable, etc. Refer to factory technical support. Refer to factory technical support. RF Link test

"Ping" a base station Ping Successful as per sec-

tion 4.4.4.4 Check on the RIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range

(i.e. better than -107dBm) or Refer to factory technical support. Set the service monitor to generate at the levels mentioned below. The carrier generated should be modu-

lated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation of +/- 4.0kHz (full ch.) or +/-2.5kHz (half ch.). Main Receiver RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm Aux Receiver repeat as per step 7

- 70 dBm +/-3

-110 dBm +/-3

-120 dBm +/- 3 RIS bar graph same as step 7 RIS bar graph Refer to factory technical support. The RSSI checks give a good indication of re-

ceivers' health. Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model) or 35 watts (800MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 120 20110-131 18 GeminiPD Installation Guide 6. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Tx Frequency Rx Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Modes of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector Interface connector RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Selectivity (25KHz) Selectivity (12.5) Intermodulation Spurious rejection FM hum & noise Conducted spurious

* psophometrically weighted filter UHF 1 403 - 512 MHz 403 - 512 MHz 1 800 MHz 806 824 MHz (821-824) 851 869 MHz (866-869) 12.5 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Simplex or Half Duplex 16 internally stored 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external 2 & 4 Amp fuse internal

< 550 mA Standby (with auxiliary receiver)

< 15 A 5 MHz typical 7.050 D x 6.000 W x 2.0000 H

< 3.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female GPS RX: SMA female 3x DE-9F D-subminiature

< 0.35 V *

75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 65 dB typical 60 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum

-45 dB typical *

< -57 dBm 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20110-131 19 GeminiPD Installation Guide TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise Attack time Operation Data rates and Modulation type Packet Error Rate

(for < 1% error) UHF = 10-40 watts 800 MHz = 5-35 watts 20% @ full power, 30 secs. max. TX time (subject to FCC MPE limit)

-75 dBc (-38 dBm @10 W) typical 1.5 ppm

-45 dB max (25 kHz)

< 10 ms Simplex/half duplex DGFSK: 9600 baud (9600 b/s), 19200 baud (19200 b/s) *

SRRC4FSK: 9600 baud (19200 b/s), 12800 baud (25600 b/s) *

better than 112 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel, with P/D (DGFSK)*

better than 110 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK - UHF)*

better than 109 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK 800MHz)*

Dataradio Proprietary DBA Protocol

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. Different types are not on-air compatible DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs RX/TX, PWR Environmental MIL. spec. Environment Categories MIL Spec. 810E Other Low Pressure High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Shock Solar Radiation Rain Humidity Dust Vibration Shock Operations Operations, Storage Operations, Storage Transfer of equipment Heat effects Drip rain Induced, Aggravated Blowing dust Ground Mobile Functional, Bench handling Method 500.3 501.3 502.3 503.3 505.3 506.3 507.3 510.3 514.4 516.4 Procedure II I(A1), II I(C3), II (C1) I(AI,C2) I II II,III I I(8) I,VI FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS FCC IC (DOC) UHF EOTGPDA 773195525A 800 MHz EOTGPDB 773195643A Baud rate EMISSION DESIGNATORS Bit rate 9600 16000 19200 19200 25600 9600 16000 19200 9600 12800 Modulation DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK SRRC4FSK*

SRRC4FSK*

IEC IP54 only II IEC IP54 EIA RS-204C Forestry EIA RS-204C UHF 8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID tba 800MHz 8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID 15K6FID

* FCC Class II permissive change Pending IC Class II permissive change 120 20110-131 20 GeminiPD Installation Guide

 

 

GeminiPD Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 1.44 Preliminary For Internal Use Only The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2000 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. November, 2001 Part no.: 120 20110-144 Table of Contents 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW.....................................................................................................................................1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE..........................................................................................................................................1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................................1 1.2.1 Features....................................................................................................................................................1 1.2.2 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................1 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT..........................................................................................................................2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY.........................................................................................................................................2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS .........................................................................................................................................2 Factory Repair .........................................................................................................................................2 1.6 UNPACKING........................................................................................................................................................2 1.5.1 2. INSTALLATION..................................................................................................................................................3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................3 2.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................3 2.1.2 Location....................................................................................................................................................3 2.1.3 Cable Path................................................................................................................................................3 2.2 WARNINGS .........................................................................................................................................................3 RF Radiation warning..............................................................................................................................3 Interference with vehicular electronics...................................................................................................3 Secure mounting.......................................................................................................................................4 Explosive environments............................................................................................................................4 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. .................................................................................4 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT...................................................................................................................................................4 Recommended tools and supplies.............................................................................................................4 Physical mounting of GeminiPD................................................................................................................4 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................5 Electrical requirements............................................................................................................................5 Routing of power cable ............................................................................................................................5 2.5 ANTENNA ...........................................................................................................................................................7 Recommended tools and supplies.............................................................................................................7 Planning ...................................................................................................................................................7 Antenna Installation.................................................................................................................................8 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION....................................................................................................8 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION .............................................................................................................8 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.6. 2.7. 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................9 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS......................................................................................................................................9 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE......................................................................................................................................10 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels..............................................................................................................10 3.2.1 4. WINRIS PROGRAM.........................................................................................................................................11 4.1 OPERATION.......................................................................................................................................................11 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START WINRIS ....................................................................................................................11 4.3 WINDOW ..........................................................................................................................................................12 4.4 FUNCTIONS.......................................................................................................................................................13 4.4.1 Station Reset button...........................................................................................................................13 4.4.2 Configuration to a file............................................................................................................................13 Get button..................................................................................................................................... 13 Get As button ................................................................................................................................ 14 4.4.3 Configuration from a File......................................................................................................................14 Put From button ............................................................................................................................ 14 Special Functions ...................................................................................................................................14 Banner Field ..................................................................................................................................... 14 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4.3.1 4.4.4.1 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.3 Comments........................................................................................................................................ 15 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 15 Test Functions ........................................................................................................................................15 DSR signal is High indicator ............................................................................................................... 15 4.4.5.1 CTS signal is High indicator ............................................................................................................... 16 4.4.5.2 Channel Selection.............................................................................................................................. 16 4.4.5.3 RSSI & Power Out Indicators.............................................................................................................................. 16 TXON tests...................................................................................................................................... 16 4.4.5.5 4.4.5.5.1 Unmodulated Carrier..................................................................................................................... 16 4.4.5.5.2 Modulated Carrier......................................................................................................................... 17 Ping Button ...................................................................................................................................... 17 Ping addresses .................................................................................................................................. 17 Status Bar ...............................................................................................................................................17 4.4.5.6 4.4.5.7 4.4.6 5. TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING .......................................................................................................19 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED......................................................................................................................................19 5.2 BASIC TESTS.....................................................................................................................................................19 5.3 GPS TEST.........................................................................................................................................................19 6. SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................................................................................22 FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS......................................................................................................5 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................5 FIGURE 3 - DC POWER CONNECTOR................................................................................................................................6 FIGURE 4 - ANTENNA SPACING ........................................................................................................................................7 FIGURE 5 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS...............................................................................................................................9 FIGURE 6 - WINRIS WINDOW.........................................................................................................................................12 FIGURE 7 - SELECT PORT WINDOW.................................................................................................................................13 FIGURE 8 - SHOW ALL CHANNEL FREQUENCY ...............................................................................................................16 PD TABLE 1 - GEMINI LEDS INDICATIONS......................................................................................................................10 TABLE 2 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS ................................................................................................................................10 TABLE 3 - CARRIER MODULATION..................................................................................................................................17 TABLE 4 - KEY LATCH INDICATIONS...............................................................................................................................18 TABLE 5 - TESTS, FULL & HALF CHANNEL UNITS ..........................................................................................................20 APPENDIX 1 - "OFFICER REQUIRES ASSISTANCE" ALARM FUNCTION .......................................................................24 120 20110-144 ii GeminiPD Installation Guide What's New in this version History Version 1.44 (Preliminary), November 2001 Following sections are amended to show 32 kbps bitrates with RC4FSK modulation in 25kHz channel spacing bit rates.

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation

- Table 5 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications, emission designators History Version 1.43 (Preliminary), October 2001 Following sections are amended to show 32 kbps bitrates with RC4FSK modulation in 25kHz channel spacing bit rates.

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation

- Table 5 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications Version 1.42 (Preliminary), April 2001 Following sections are amended to show SRRC4FSK 12.5kHz channel spacing bit rates.

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation

- Table 5 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications Version 1.41, March 2001 Section 2.5 Antenna and Figure 4 Antenna spacing amended to show FCCs RF Exposure Guidelines for increased Duty Cycle. Version 1.40, December 2000 Supporting footnotes for Gemini/PD Lite model (No GPS option) added. 120 20110-144 iii GeminiPD Installation Guide Section 3.2, function of DE-9F pin 9 (Aux input) corrected and clari-

fied. Section 4.0, re-written to support the WinRIS program. Section 5.0, Table 5, step 4, values revised. Section 6.0, MIL Specifications limitations note added. Appendix 1, clarification of Officer Requires Assistance alarm function added. Version 1.32, October 2000 Updated UHF units specifications:

- Table 3 "Carrier Modulation"

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications. Version 1.31, August 2000 Introduction of 25.6 Kbps model. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation"

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications.

- Emission designators table added to Section 6 Specifications. Version 1.30, August 2000 Power output specifications for 800MHz model added to section 1.2.1 Features. Main transceiver Output Power for 800MHz model added to:

Table 4 Tests, Full and Half Channel Units and minimum value edited in the footnote. Title of section 4.4.4.2 edited to specify that RSSI Indicator also serves as power meter. Note added to establish that the internal wattmeter is not to be interpreted as a precision instrument. Section 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated Carrier edited to show 800MHz model power check nominal forward wattage. Section 2.4.2 Routing of Power Cable, step no. 7, clarification of negative wire connection. 120 20110-144 iv GeminiPD Installation Guide Version 1.20, June 2000:

LED indication explanation for the 800MHz (2% duty cycle limit) model added as a footnote to table 1 and to section 5.3 GPS Test. Section 2.5 Antenna rewritten and now including more details con-

cerning Planning and has a new antenna spacing drawing. More details added to section 4.2 concerning starting of the WinRIS program from MS-Windows. Environmental MIL spec added FCC Certification number added to Specifications section. Version 1.10, March 2000:

Addition of 800MHz specifications, revision to paragraph 2.2.1 - RF Ra-

diation Warning and to paragraphs 2.5 through 2.5.3. Antenna installa-

tion. Version 1.0, January 2000:

First released version 120 20110-144 v GeminiPD Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU GeminiPD GeminiPD Lite HDX RS-232 Simplex WinRIS Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. GeminiPD Control Unit board High specs mobile radiomodem. PD = Parallel decode GeminiPD without GPS feature Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. A unit which uses the same frequency for transmit and receive. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configuration. 120 20110-144 vi GeminiPD Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information re-

quired for the installation, operation and verification of the DATARADIO GeminiPD mobile radiomodem. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engi-

neering design, installation, and maintenance personnel. 1.2 General Description GeminiPD is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usu-

ally from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief re-

sponses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. The GeminiPD is made-up of a main transceiver and an auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode (PD), a 40-Watt power amplifier (35-Watt for 800 MHz model), a GeminiPD Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem and an optional integrated OEM GPS receiver. *

1.2.1 Features One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology (patent pending) featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer effective throughput. and more retries Automatic channel changing for im-

proved roaming capabilities. Builtin, up to 16-channel flash EEPROM programmable synthesized radio transceiver with automatic channel selection. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

- DGFSK* modulation, rates of 9600 to 19200 b/s in 12.5 or 25 kHz channel spacing (9600 b/s maximum in half channels). or

xRC4FSK* modulation, rates of 32.0, 25.6 and 19.2 kb/s in 25 kHz or 16.0 and 14.4 Kb/s in 12.5 kHz channel spacing. 3 available user ports using standard RS-232 interface via built-in multi-

plexer. Half-duplex or simplex operation. Out-of-band signaling enables transmis-

sion of GPS* reports with no effect on system performance. Back-compatible with MobilPac/R

(DGFSK)* at 9600 and 19200 b/s. 1.2.2 Configuration GeminiPD is factory configured based on each customer network system requirements, usually by Dataradio System Engineering. Configuration is not changeable in the field without notifying Dataradio.

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 120 20110-144 1 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is not field serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Spe-

cialized equipment and training is required to repair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service in-

formation before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may sug-

gest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact per-

son who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Informa-

tion about these charges is available from Technical Support. 1.6 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully unpack your GeminiPD kit (p/n 023 6000-001) ship-

ping carton and identify each item as listed below:

One GeminiPD Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Installation mounting bracket 120 20110-144 2 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum position for GeminiPD and its antennas as well as the routing of all associ-

ated cabling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the GeminiPD unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna DE-9 connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling GeminiPD is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, windows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that mate-

rial can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of someone bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (ex-

haust pipes, mufflers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automo-

bile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive com-

puter modules, other electronic modules and ignition circuits to help prevent interference between these components and radio equip-

ment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and below or beneath the doors, channels through doors and window columns that are convenient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning The Federal Communications Commission

(FCC), with its action in the General Docket, 79-144, March 13, 1985, has adopted a safety standard for the human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC-regulated equipment. Only proper installation of the transceiver antenna of GeminiPD as summarized in section 2.5 will result in user exposure substantially below the FCC recommended limits. Qualified personnel must do all antenna in-

stallations. See paragraph 2.5.2 for recom-

mended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals out-

side the vehicle are within two feet of the antenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protec-

tion from radio frequency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

- Electronic fuel injection systems

- Electronic anti-skid braking systems

- Electronic cruise control systems 120 20110-144 3 GeminiPD Installation Guide If the installation vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform nor-

mally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount Gem-

iniPD securely so that the unit will not break loose in case of an accident or violent ma-

neuvers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

- Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as GeminiPD.

- Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or from the vehicle. Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. GeminiPD installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection As-

sociation Standard NFPA 58 which requires:

Space containing radio equipment shall

be isolated by a seal from the space containing the LP-gas container and its fittings.

- Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed ac-

cording the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of meas-

uring forward and reflected power at the operating frequency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of GeminiPD Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting GeminiPD to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the GeminiPD may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. GeminiPD is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid dam-

aging some vital part of the ve-

hicle such as fuel tanks, trans-

mission housing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws the mounting surface prior to in-

stallation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. extend below 120 20110-144 4 GeminiPD Installation Guide Do not overtighten self-

tapping screws. 1. Once you have found a suitable mount-

ing position for GeminiPD, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the position provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements GeminiPD is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 15.0A. It will tolerate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system

(mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to iso-

late the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. 2. Using the installation bracket as a tem-

Warnings:

plate, mark the four locations for drilling

(see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a center punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting. 6. Securely mount GeminiPD to the installed bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. Application of more than 16.3 VDC will damage GeminiPD and is not covered by the warranty. Always disconnect GeminiPDs DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting

(e.g. when jump starting the ve-

hicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles bat-

tery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manu-

facturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise ex-

treme caution throughout the installation and fit the fuse only when the installa-

tion is complete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power ca-

ble consists of three wires attached to a Packard Electric Weather-Pack con-

nector (DC power Connector). 120 20110-144 5 GeminiPD Installation Guide The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to ignition) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) Figure 3 - DC Power Connector 3. Place this connector at GeminiPDs radio power input location. Do not connect at SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE) 13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire) GROUND

(Blue wire) C B A IGNITION

(Small red wire) this time. See paragraph 2.6, Complet-

ing the physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be installed, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Secure the wires at several loca-

tions along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the positive lead at the battery positive terminal. Attach the negative wire at the vehicle end of the battery ground cable. If the negative cable is connected directly to the battery negative terminal, it should be fused in case of failure of the vehicles ground cable. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the connection will be made for switch sensing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have GeminiPD turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ignition key. Connect to Accessory if you wish GeminiPD to be available when the engine is not running, but still de-

pendent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the con-

trolled-side of the ChargeGuard

(remembering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was required, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion com-

pound. Insert the fuse only when installa-

tion is complete and ready to test. 11. At the GeminiPD position, neatly coil cable slack and attach securely. 120 20110-144 6 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2.5 Antenna To meet the FCCs RF Exposure Guidelines, the main transmitter antenna must be vehicle-

mounted to provide a separation distance of 50 cm or more from all persons and the an-

tenna gain must not exceed 5dB to satisfy RF exposure requirements. MPE 50cm 19.7in. 2.5.1 Recommended tools and 24in. supplies circle cutter hole saw or Mini-UHF Crimp tool socket punch for antenna 5/8

(UHF: 18"/46cm 800MHz: 9"/23cm) R T G Figure 4 - Antenna spacing Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

- Most preferred for all antennas: center-

line of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position.

- Less preferred for receiver antenna:

trunk lid, providing distance to transmit-

ting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed.

- Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fend-

ers, just in back of rear window

- Least preferred, but permissible for re-

ceiver antenna: left or right front fenders, ahead of windshield Note:

Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual inter-

ference especially at higher fre-

quencies. 2.5.2 Planning Referring to Figure 4, GeminiPD commonly uses three separate antennas:

T - Main transceiver -

Constraints are Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE on the drawing) limits of 50 cm (as per see section 2.5 above) and omni-directional factors R - Auxiliary receiver Constraints are the receiver spacing of at least 5/8 (wavelength) from trans-

ceiver antenna and omni-directional re-

quirements G - Global Positioning System (GPS)*

Constraints are TX spacing of at least 24-in/60.96 cm from all transmitting an-

tennas and a clear view of the sky. For the optimum antenna spacing at the fre-

quency you are using, consult System Engi-

neering. For installation of ground-plane dependent antennas, the center of the metal surface used for mounting is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas, in-

stallation may be close to the edges of the surface.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 120 20110-144 7 GeminiPD Installation Guide Connect DC Power cables connector to GeminiPDs until you hear a click as the two parts snap together. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal op-

eration and to run the Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. 2.7. Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1. Check for proper operation of the GeminiPDs LEDs as per Table 1 in sec-

tion 3.1 2. Using the WinRIS program (described in section 4) and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to con-

firm main antenna installation. 3. Using the WinRIS, check the RF link with a base station that can be heard by using the WinRIS Ping feature (see paragraph 4.4.4.4). or If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial ca-

bles (e.g. RG-223) from each of the se-

lected antenna positions to the position where the GeminiPD unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the con-

nection. 3. At the GeminiPD position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connec-

tor. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-

UHF plug and connect to the left rear of GeminiPD. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of GeminiPD to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS*

position below the auxiliary connector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the in-

stallation, tie-wrap together the auxiliary and the GPS* antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to cor-

rectly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing GeminiPD:

120 20110-144 8 GeminiPD Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver (not installed on GeminiPD Lite model) Two LED indicators Three DE-9F RS232 ports The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS Gemini/PD PWR PGM RX TX PC/SETUP

0 0 0

. 2 DEV-3 DEV-2 DEV-1 6.000"

Figure 5 - Front and rear panels 120 20110-144 9 GeminiPD Installation Guide Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications GeminiPD LEDs indications Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) RX / TX Indication PWR Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) Indication Indication RX / TX PWR Red Amber Green Red Slow Red/Green Fast Red/Green l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S Red Off Off Off Red Red Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state Hardware failure Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress Green*

Normal ready state Off No network activity Amber*

1 Pulse/sec. Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Receiving packets DBA sync allows transmit Amber Receiving packets DBA out-of-sync prevents transmit Red Transmitting

* For 800MHz model (using 25% duty cycle limit) PWR lit Green / Flashing Amber = normal indication (GPS 1pulse per sec.) PWR lit Amber / Flashing Green = exceeded duty cycle (GPS 1pps) We recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire ca-

ble with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance & ad-

justment as well to connect user applications. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 2 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term 1 OFF Alternates asserted, spacing dropped, marking Signal level

+3 to +15 V

-3 to -15 V 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports:

DE-9 F pin #

Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD from GeminiPD, normally asserted RXD data from GeminiPD TXD data to GeminiPD DTR to GeminiPD, handshaking Ground DSR from GeminiPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to GeminiPD, handshaking CTS from GeminiPD, handshaking AUX - auxiliary input to GeminiPD,

(for port 2: Officer requires assistance Alarm input) It may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external

+12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs. See Appendix A on page 24 for further details. 120 20110-144 10 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4. WinRIS program The Windows Radio

(WinRIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot GeminiPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field-configuring units (Re-

Installation Software quires intervention with technical support). To run the program, you will need:

A PC or portable computer running a 32-bit MS-

Windows application:

Win ME Win2000 Win NT Win 9x Note:

WinRIS does not operate under:

Win CE (embedded in PocketPC) 16-bit Windows 3.x

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most actions can also be done using keyboard command 4.1 Operation This support program can be run Windows mode. in MS-

DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and failure to run the program alone results in unexpected transmissions. Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. 4.2 To connect and start WinRIS Connect a suitable 9-conductor straight RS-232 cable, between front-mounted PC/Setup port and the RS-232 port of the PC or portable computer that will be running Gem-

ini.exe program. units the GeminiPDs WinRIS program is available on diskette, Dataradio p/n 980 03392-00n. Refer to the WinRIS Readme.txt file for details on how to set MS-Windows environment, con-

nect, install and run this pro-

gram. In summary, before starting the WinRIS when running MS-Windows, click on Start, then on

"Run". Type the relevant path and variables on the command line (or select by browsing) leading to:

WinRIS.EXE COM[x], [speed],8,n,1

(where x is the PC COM port to be used) Of course, the executable command may be used alone without any variable added. Click on OK. It is also possible to create a PC desktop short-

cut icon for WinRIS:

Start by right clicking anywhere on the desktop, Select New, Select Shortcut and type the path as detailed above directly on the command line (with or without variables). Click Next, Type in an applicable name for the shortcut icon, Click Next Select an icon (your choice) and Click on Finish. Command line settings override the environment variable, if any. 120 20110-144 11 GeminiPD Installation Guide Figure 6 - WinRIS window 4.3 Window This program uses one main display screen only. Placing the cursor over a Toolbar or Button gen-

erates a ScreenTip. Referring to Figure 6, start-

ing from top and moving down to the bottom, the screen display is made up of:

A Menu bar, containing the menu names listed below. They give access to command options. Unavailable commands are shown in light gray color. Shortcut keys are listed whenever available.

! File menu lists the:

- Put From command (Ctrl+O)

- Get command (Ctrl+S)

- Get As command and below a command separator, the:

- Exit command

! Test menu lists the:

- Modulated command

- UnModulated command

! View menu lists the:

- Toolbar checked command

- Status bar checked command

! Help menu lists the:

- Help Topics command and below a command separator, the:

- About WinRIS command A Toolbar row, located immediately below the menu bar containing buttons (each bear-

ing an icon) for commonly used tasks as follows:

! Put From button

! Get button Get As button 120 20110-144 12 GeminiPD Installation Guide and to the right of a bar separator, the:

! About button and the

! Context-sensitive Help button An Indicator and Button bar, located im-

mediately below the Toolbar row, it contains two circular indicators

! DSR signal is High indicator

! CTS signal is High indicator and three buttons for commonly used tasks as follows.

! Station Reset button

! Modulated TXON button

! Unmodulated TXON button A Product field, displays product type be-

ing used after a connection to the product has been established A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, to select and activate a channel. A Test section, with a Ping button and the relevant address field. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or warning windows. 4.4 Functions The WinRIS program is used to:

Save an existing configuration from a unit to a file. Take a configuration from a file and upload it to a unit Check GeminiPD Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.4.1 Station Reset button The Station Reset button is the only button available when first starting the program and is used to initiate the connection process. Press Station Reset. Enter Port and Baud rate information in the Select Port sub-window. Figure 7 - Select Port window Press OK to validate the selection (or Can-

cel to exit back to the main screen). All test buttons and fields are now activated. The Station Reset button is also pressed as a last step after doing a Put From. The Station Reset button causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Station Reset is not required after doing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. Station Reset does not break the connection. 4.4.2 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. Get button 4.4.2.1 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get command or press the Get button on the Tool-

bar to:

Establish linking 120 20110-144 13 GeminiPD Installation Guide Download and automatically save the con-

nected units configuration setting to a file named with the unit' serial number: The WinRIS status bar will then report All pa-

rameters are successfully retrieved and saved in file [unit' s/n].GM2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Get As button 4.4.2.2 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get As command or press the Get As button on the Toolbar to:

Establish linking Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.gm2 (already selected). Save the connected units operating charac-

teristics (configuration setting) to a file, di-

rectory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are suc-

cessfully retrieved and saved in [filename]. 4.4.3 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a unit is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 4.4.3.1 1- On the menu bar, select File, then the Put Put From button From command or press the Put From button on the Toolbar. 2- In the Open window, locate the drive, di-

rectory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. The status bar reports: [filename] is downloading into unit and up to 30 seconds later displays: All parameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect! . 6- Press the Station Reset button. See section 4.4.1 for details. 4.4.4 Special Functions The following WinRIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the connected unit:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button Banner Field 4.4.4.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmwares used and their version number. Format is:

[serial number]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version #. The serial number portion uniquely identifies the unit. It is a variable length, maximum eight-

character alphabetic string assigned at the time of manufacture. It is identical to the serial num-

ber printed on the label of the unit. This number cannot be changed and is used as part of the on-

air protocol. 120 20110-144 14 GeminiPD Installation Guide The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Da-

taradio urges you to use external encryption technology (such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES)) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 4.4.5 Test Functions The following WinRIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

DSR signal is High indicator CTS signal is High indicator Channels select Show All Channel Frequencies RSSI Indicator TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Ping Address and Ping button 4.4.5.1 DSR signal is High indicator The Data Set Ready (DSR) indicator light, located on the button bar (leftmost), is an RS-

232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indi-

cates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used requires that DSR be normally asserted. GeminiPD's firmwares resides in flash EPROM and are designed to allow field upgrades. When contacting your supplier, give the full ban-

ner string and the version of the WinRIS used. You will find the version number by selecting the Help menu option, then About WinRIS command or pressing the About button on the Toolbar. The Banner field is blank prior to doing a

"Get", "Get As" or "Put From". 4.4.4.2 Comments 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) (customer name, location, etc). 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no com-

ment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.4.4.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field will require that the correct password be entered. If none was entered, the field will remain blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. 120 20110-144 15 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4.4.5.2 CTS signal is High indicator The Clear-to-Send (CTS) indicator light, lo-

cated on the button bar (second indicator from the left), is an RS-232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indicates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used re-

quires that CTS be normally asserted. 4.4.5.3 Channel Selection Select the radio channel on which you wish to send a test transmission by clicking the relevant available option button. The program automatically detects which of sixteen channels are present on the connected unit. For each factory-set channel available, the relevant round option button and channel number is enabled (black). For each unavailable channel, the round option button and channel number ap-

pears disabled (grayed-out). Only one channel at a time may be selected. Pressing the Show All Channel Frequencies button opens a sub-window (see Figure 8) listing in tabular form the radio transmitting and re-

ceiving frequencies programmed for each avail-

able channel(s). To exit this sub-window, press the upper right system box. Figure 8 - Show All Channel Frequency RSSI & Power Out Indicators 4.4.5.4 The Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) bar graph usually displays in twin-columns the rela-

tive strength (in dBm) of an incoming RF signal on the selected channel. The left column indication, labeled "I", shows the transceiver RX signal (rear mini-UHF con-

nector). The right column indication, labeled "II", shows the auxiliary RX signal (front mini-UHF connec-

tor). Meter precision is usually better than 3 dBm. This indicator functions as a single column

"Power" (Watt) meter when using either of the test functions: "TXON (Modulated)" or "TXON

(Unmodulated)" with a range of 0 to 60 watts. Precision is usually better than +/-3 watts. Note:

This internal wattmeter is designed for use as reference only and is not a sub-

stitute for a quality external precision measuring instrument. TXON tests 4.4.5.5 TXON test functions are selected by choosing Test from the file menu, then Modulated or UnModulated command or by pressing the relevant button on the Toolbar. Unmodulated Carrier 4.4.5.5.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reverse power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to trans-

mit an unmodulated 20-seconds test signal on the channel selected or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Power check:

1- Connect an in-line power meter between the radio and the antenna. 2- Measure the forward (nominal 40W for UHF model and 35W for 800MHz model) and re-

flected power levels by powering TX ON 120 20110-144 16 GeminiPD Installation Guide

(<5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng.). base station by sending a short transmission query and receiving a confirming response. 4.4.5.5.2 Modulated Carrier Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with 1kHz sinewave, at deviation level that de-

pends on model and network speed:

Table 3 - Carrier Modulation Carrier Modulation Full Channel Network Speed RC4FS K C R R S K S F 4 K S M G D 32000 25600 19200 19200 16000 9600 Typical Deviation 4.51)/3.62) kHz 4.01)/3.72) kHz 4.51)/4.32) kHz 4.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 3.0 kHz Half Channel Network Speed C R R S K S F 4 DGMSK 16000 14400 9600 Typical Deviation 1.6/2.43) kHz 2.0/2.83) kHz 2.5 kHz Different modulation types are not interoperable 1) 2) UHF model USA NPSPAC 821-824MHz &866-869MHz band model 800MHz model 3) This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to begin transmitting a 20-seconds modulated test signal on the channel or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Ping Button 4.4.5.6 The Ping function checks connectivity by testing the ability of GeminiPD to communicate with the 1- Specify the channel (paragraph 4.4.5.3) and ping address (paragraph 4.4.5.7) 2- Press the Ping button to start ping testing. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during pinging. The program sends a test query and continues transmitting pings at brief intervals. As soon as a Ping test signal is returned from the address selected, the status bar displays:

Ping Successful and pinging stops. If no ping signal is received after 60 sec-

onds, ping testing stops and the status bar displays Ping Failed. Ping addresses 4.4.5.7 Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Ping Address field in two ways:

1. Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126. 2. As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) ad-

dress, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN. The base address is usually: 1. The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

For ParagonPD product:

Ping address is not in AMN or number format or For GeminiPD product:

Ping address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 4.4.6 Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom edge of the WinRIS window. To display or hide the bar, check or uncheck the command in the View menu. 120 20110-144 17 GeminiPD Installation Guide The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you navigate using the direc-

tional arrows. This area also shows messages describing actions of toolbar buttons as you de-

press them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button. Warning and Caution messages appear in pop-up sub-windows. To close these message boxes, press the ESC key. Three boxes on the right of the status bar indi-

cate which of the following keys are latched down:

Indicator Description CAP NUM SCRL The Caps Lock key is latched down. The Num Lock key is latched down. The Scroll Lock key is latched down. Table 4 - Key latch indications 120 20110-144 18 GeminiPD Installation Guide 5. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in per-

formance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect GeminiPD to the service monitor. 5.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. Link test between Gemini and the base sta-

tion. 6. GPS test (not required on GeminiPD Lite model). Refer to Table 5 for checks 1 to 5. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months Refer to the WinRIS section for function details 5.3 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the GeminiPD front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second.1 This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground posi-

tion solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital volt-

meter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS cable, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short circuit the GPS antenna is either a passive antenna which is the WRONG type, or a defective active antenna, replace with a known good active antenna. three minutes for 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait the POSITION about ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on GeminiPD, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective 120 20110-144 19 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1 Lit green and flashing amber for the 800MHz model un-

der 2% duty cycle limit. Table 5 - Tests, Full & Half Channel Units CHECKLIST STEP GeminiPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

ACTION EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C 1 2 Power-up LED Sequence Connect and save con-

fig Press WinRIS Get button 3 Main transceiver Out-

put Power Press TX (Unmod) 4 Main transceiver Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) 5 Carrier Frequency Er-

ror Press TX (Unmod) 4 TX Deviation (KHz) Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. as per Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications as per section 4.4.2 UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts both +10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts (5 watts for 800MHz model) as per customer request

<5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng. Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line wattmeter 10W in-line wattmeter Refer to factory technical support. Check for bad connec-

tions, damaged coax cable, etc. 300 Hz Service monitor set to read frequency error Refer to factory technical support. xRC4FSK UHF 800 US 800 CA Speed\

32.0 kb/s 4.5 25.6 kb/s 4.0 19.2 kb/s 4.5 Full channel unit 3.6 3.7 4.5 3.6 3.7 4.5 Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Refer to factory technical support. Half channel unit 1.6 2.0 16.0 kb/s 1.6 14.4 kb/s: 2.0 2.4 2.8 DGFSK, Full ch. unit:

19.2 and 16 kb/s: 4.0 kHz 9.6 kb/s: 3.0 kHz DGFSK, Half ch. unit:

9.6 kb/s: 2.5 kHz Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. 5 RF Link test

"Ping" a base station Ping Successful as per section 4.4.5.6 Check on the WinRIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range (i.e. better than -107dBm) or Refer to factory technical support. 6 Set the service monitor to generate at the levels mentioned below. The carrier generated should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation of +/- 4.0kHz (full ch.) or +/-2.5kHz (half ch.). 7 Main Receiver RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm Aux Receiver 8 repeat as per step 7

- 70 dBm +/-3

-110 dBm +/-3

-120 dBm +/- 3 same as step 7 WinRIS bar graph WinRIS bar graph Refer to factory technical support. The RSSI checks give a good indication of re-

ceivers' health. Refer to factory technical support. 120 20110-144 20 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model) or 35 watts (800MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the trans-

mitter. 120 20110-144 21 GeminiPD Installation Guide 6. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Tx Frequency Rx Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Modes of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector UHF 1 403 - 512 MHz 1 403 - 512 MHz 800 MHz 806 824 MHz (821-824) 851 869 MHz (866-869) 12.5 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Simplex or Half Duplex 16 internally stored 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external 2 & 4 Amp fuse internal

< 550 mA Standby (with auxiliary receiver)

< 15 A 5 MHz typical 7.050 D x 6.000 W x 2.0000 H

< 3.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female Interface connector 3x DE-9F D-subminiature GPS RX: SMA female (Not installed for Gemini PD Lite version) RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Selectivity (25KHz) Selectivity (12.5) Intermodulation Spurious rejection FM hum & noise Conducted spurious

* psophometrically weighted filter

< 0.35 V *

75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 65 dB typical 60 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum

-45 dB typical *

< -57 dBm 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20110-144 22 GeminiPD Installation Guide TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise Attack time Operation Data rates and Modulation type Packet Error Rate

(for < 1% error) UHF = 10-40 watts 800 MHz = 5-35 watts 20% @ full power, 30 secs. max. TX time (subject to FCC MPE limit)

-75 dBc (-38 dBm @10 W) typical 1.5 ppm

-45 dB max (25 kHz)

< 10 ms Simplex/half duplex DGFSK (9600 b/s), (19200 b/s) *

SRRC4FSK (19200 b/s), (25600 b/s) *

better than 112 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel, with P/D (DGFSK)*

Protocol

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. Different types are not on-air compatible better than 110 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK - UHF)*

better than 109 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK 800MHz)*

Dataradio Proprietary DBA DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs RX/TX, PWR Environmental MIL. spec. Environment Categories MIL Spec. 810E Other Low Pressure High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Shock Solar Radiation Rain1 Humidity1 Dust1 Vibration Shock Operations Operations, Storage Operations, Storage Transfer of equipment Heat effects Drip rain Induced, Aggravated Blowing dust Ground Mobile Functional, Bench handling Method 500.3 501.3 502.3 503.3 505.3 506.3 507.3 510.3 514.4 516.4 Procedure II I(A1), II I(C3), II (C1) I(AI,C2) I II II,III I I(8) I,VI IEC IP54 only II IEC IP54 EIA RS-204C Forestry EIA RS-204C FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS FCC IC (DOC) UHF EOTGPDA 773195525A 800 MHz EOTGPDB 773195643A Modulation UHF Baud rate EMISSION DESIGNATORS Bit rate 9600 16000 19200 19200 25600 16000 14400 32000 9600 16000 19200 9600 12800 8000 7200 16000 DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK SRRC4FSK*

SRRC4FSK*

SRRC4FSK*

SRRC4FSK*

RC4FSK*

8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID 15K6F1D 8K17F1D 8K67F1D 16K8F1D 800MHz 8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID 15K6FID 10K0F1D 11K0F1D 15K6F1D 1 MIL Specification not guaranteed with GeminiPD Lite version.

* IC Class II permissive change 120 20110-144 23 GeminiPD Installation Guide Appendix 1 - "Officer Requires Assistance" alarm function The contents of this appendix are also available as Technical Instruction Sheet 009 (TIS009), document part number 122 20110-009 dated December 20, 2000. Overview The DTE Port Interface pin 9 (AUX) on DEV-2 is used for the Officer Requires Assistance alarm function. Intended Audience This document is designed for use by System Integrators. Physical Connection This auxiliary input may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It can also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs (debounced for approximately 100 ms). Operation When using GeminiPD or GeminiPD Lite products, activating the Officer Requires Assistance alarm input starts emergency communications:

The modem creates DMP x or y messages. Any other pending message(s) will be failed to avoid delaying the alarm message on account of lower priority traffic and to remove non-emergency messages from duty-cycle management

(if applicable). In the case of a q message, a D-NAK* will be immediately returned. Base and Channel hunt will take place for the usual number of retries per base (according to configuration) but will cycle forever until D-ACKed* or Reset*. Lack of base DBA synch will not prevent transmission to maximize the chance that a base gets the alarm signal. DBA Freewheel mode will be forced until the alarm is acknowledged.

* For details on DMP terms, refer to DMP 1.5 manual, version 4.0 120 20110-144 24 GeminiPD Installation Guide

 

 

GeminiPD+

Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 1.06 PRELIMINARY The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2002 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. December, 2002 Part no.: 120 20120-106 Preliminary Table of Contents 1. 2. 1.5.1 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 PRODUCT OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................. 1 1.2.2 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................... 2 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT........................................................................................................................ 2 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY ...................................................................................................................................... 2 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................................................................................................... 2 Factory Repair ........................................................................................................................................ 2 1.6 UNPACKING ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................... 3 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 3 2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 3 2.1.2 Location .................................................................................................................................................. 3 2.1.3 Cable Path............................................................................................................................................... 3 2.2 WARNINGS........................................................................................................................................................ 3 RF Radiation warning............................................................................................................................. 3 Interference with vehicular electronics................................................................................................... 3 Secure mounting...................................................................................................................................... 3 Explosive environments........................................................................................................................... 4 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. ................................................................................. 4 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT................................................................................................................................................. 4 Recommended tools and supplies............................................................................................................ 4 Physical mounting of GeminiPD+ ............................................................................................................. 4 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................. 5 Electrical requirements........................................................................................................................... 5 Routing of power cable ........................................................................................................................... 5 2.5 ANTENNA ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 Recommended tools and supplies............................................................................................................ 7 Planning.................................................................................................................................................. 7 Antenna Installation................................................................................................................................ 8 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. ............................................................................................... 8 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 8 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................... 9 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS ................................................................................................................................... 9 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE ................................................................................................................................... 10 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels ............................................................................................................. 10 TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING ..................................................................................................... 11 4.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ................................................................................................................................... 11 4.2 BASIC TESTS................................................................................................................................................... 11 4.3 ADDITIONAL TEST DETAILS ............................................................................................................................. 15 4.3.1 GPS Test................................................................................................................................................ 15 4.3.2 RF Data Link Test ................................................................................................................................. 15 SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................................................... 16 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.6. 2.7. 4. 5. FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS.................................................................................................... 5 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................................. 5 FIGURE 3 - DC POWER CONNECTOR.............................................................................................................................. 6 FIGURE 4 - ANTENNA SPACING....................................................................................................................................... 7 FIGURE 5 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS ............................................................................................................................ 9 TABLE 1 - GEMINIPD+ LEDS INDICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 10 TABLE 2 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS.............................................................................................................................. 10 TABLE 3 - TESTS, FULL CHANNEL UNITS..................................................................................................................... 12 TABLE 4 - TESTS, SPECIAL & HALF CHANNEL UNITS .................................................................................................. 13 APPENDIX 1 - "OFFICER REQUIRES ASSISTANCE" ALARM FUNCTION ........................................................................... 18 120 20120-106 Preliminary ii GeminiPD+ Installation Guide What's New in this version History Version 1.06, December 2002 Introduction of xRC8FSK modulations. Version 1.05, November 2002 MM-reserved R&D in progress. Version 1.04, November 2002 Introduction of GeminiPD+ in 900 MHz frequency band. Version 1.03, October 2002 Append 1.6 dB cable losses in Section 2.5 (FCC-MPE) Version 1.02, October 2002 Update Section 2.5 (FCC-MPE) Version 1.01, October 2002 Addition of 19.2kb/s bit rate for NPSPAC channels Updated the RF exposure- related paragraphs 2.2.1, 2.5, 2.5.2 Version 1.00, May 2002 Introduction of GeminiPD+ running data rate up to 32kb/s 120 20120-106 Preliminary iii GeminiPD+ Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU GeminiPD GeminiPD+

GeminiPD Lite HDX RS-232 WinRIS Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. GeminiPD Control Unit board High specs mobile radiomodem. Limited to 25.6 kb/s. PD = Parallel decode On-air compatible with GeminiPD. Runs up to 32 kb/s GeminiPD without GPS feature Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configuration. 120 20120-106 Preliminary iv GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information re-

quired for the installation, operation and veri-

fication of the DATARADIO GeminiPD+. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engi-

neering design, installation, and maintenance personnel. 1.2 General Description GeminiPD+ is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-

only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usually from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief responses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. GeminiPD+ is made-up of:

A main transceiver An auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode

(PD) A power amplifier (40-Watt for UHF, 35-Watt for 800 MHz, 25-Watt for 900MHz models) A Gemini Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem An optional integrated OEM GPS receiver.1 1 The Gemini PD+ Lite model has no GPS. 1.2.1 Features One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Automatic channel changing for improved roaming capabilities. Builtin, up to 16-channel flash EEPROM programmable synthesized radio transceiver with automatic channel se-

lection. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

Modulation type DGMSK2 xRC4FSK2 XRC8FSK2 12.5 kHz 9.6 kb/s 8.0 kb/s 16 kb/s 14.4 kb/s 24.0 kb/s 21.6 kb/s Channel spacing NPSPAC

900 MHz 9.6 kb/s 8.0 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 16 kb/s 14.4 kb/s 28.8 kb/s 24.0 kb/s 21.6 kb/s 25 kHz 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 32 kb/s 25.6 kb/s 48.0 kb/s 43.2 kb/s 3 available user ports using standard RS-

232 interface via built-in multiplexer. Half-duplex operation. Out-of-band signaling enables transmis-

sion of GPS1 reports with no effect on system performance. On-air compatible with GeminiPD at all speeds (except 32 kb/s and xRC8FSK modulations) and with MobilPac/R at 9600 b/s and 19200 b/s (DGFSK)2 3 times faster CPU and 4 times more DSP memory for future speed upgrade 2 Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. 120 20120-105 Preliminary 1 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 1.2.2 Configuration GeminiPD+ is factory configured based on each customer network system requirements, usu-

ally by Dataradio System Engineering. Con-

figuration is not changeable in the field with-

out notifying Dataradio. 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is not field serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Special-

ized equipment and training is required to re-

pair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service infor-

mation before returning equipment. A Techni-

cal Support representative may suggest a solu-

tion eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support rep-

resentative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact person who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Information about these charges is available from Technical Sup-

port. responsible for 1.6 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully unpack your GeminiPD+ kit (p/n 023 6000-001) ship-

ping carton and identify each item as listed below:

One GeminiPD+

Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment dur-

ing shipment, file a claim with the carrier im-

mediately. Installation mounting bracket 120 20120-105 Preliminary 2 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum position for GeminiPD+ and its anten-

nas as well as the routing of all associated ca-

bling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the GeminiPD+ unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in trou-

bleshooting) Access to the antenna DE-9 connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling GeminiPD+ is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, windows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that material can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of some-

one bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (exhaust pipes, mufflers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automobile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive computer modules, other electronic modules and ignition circuits to help prevent interference between these components and radio equipment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and below or be-

neath the doors, channels through doors and 120 20120-105 Preliminary window columns that are convenient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning Recommended safety guidelines for the human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy are contained in the Canadian Safety Code 6 and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Bulletin 65. Proper instal-

lation of the transceiver antenna of GeminiPD+

as summarized in section 2.5 will result in user exposure substantially below recom-

mended limits for the general public. the Qualified personnel must do all antenna in-

stallations. See paragraph 2.5.2 for recom-

mended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals out-

side the vehicle are within two feet of the an-

tenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protection from radio frequency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

- Electronic fuel injection systems

- Electronic anti-skid braking systems

- Electronic cruise control systems If the installation vehicle contains such equip-

ment, consult the dealer for the make of vehi-

cle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform normally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount Gem-

iniPD+ securely so that the unit will not break 3 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide loose in case of an accident or violent maneu-

vers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

- Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as GeminiPD+.

- Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or from the vehicle. Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles pow-

ered by liquefied gas. GeminiPD+ installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas con-

tainer in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 58 which requires:

Space containing radio equipment shall be isolated by a seal from the space contain-

ing the LP-gas container and its fittings.

- Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed accord-

ing the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of measur-

ing forward and reflected power at the op-

erating frequency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of GeminiPD+

Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting GeminiPD+ to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the GeminiPD+

may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. GeminiPD+ is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid damaging some vital part of the vehicle such as fuel tanks, transmission hous-

ing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws extend below the mounting surface prior to instal-

lation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. Do not overtighten tapping screws. self-

120 20120-105 Preliminary 4 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 1. Once you have found a suitable mounting position for GeminiPD+, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the posi-

tion provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 2. Using the installation bracket as a tem-

plate, mark the four locations for drilling

(see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a center punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting. 6. Securely mount GeminiPD+ to the installed bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements GeminiPD+ is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 15.0A. It will toler-

ate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system

(mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to isolate the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. Warnings:

Always disconnect GeminiPD+s DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting

(e.g. when jump starting the vehicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles bat-

tery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manu-

facturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise extreme caution throughout the in-

stallation and fit the fuse only when the installation is com-

plete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power cable consists of three wires attached to a Pack-

ard Electric Weather-Pack connector

(DC power Connector). 120 20120-105 Preliminary 5 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to ignition) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE) 13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire) GROUND

(Blue wire) C B A IGNITION

(Small red wire) Figure 3 - DC Power Connector 3. Place this connector at GeminiPD+s radio power input location. Do not connect at this time. See paragraph 2.6, Completing the physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be in-

stalled, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Secure the wires at several locations along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT ac-

ceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the positive lead at the battery positive terminal. Attach the negative wire at the vehicle end of the battery ground cable. If the negative cable is connected directly to the battery negative ter-

minal, it should be fused in case of failure of the vehicles ground cable. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the connection will be made for switch sens-

ing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have GeminiPD+ turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ignition key. Connect to Accessory if you wish GeminiPD+ to be available when the engine is not running, but still depend-

ent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the con-

trolled-side of the ChargeGuard (re-

membering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was re-

quired, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion compound. Insert the fuse only when installation is complete and ready to test. 11. At the GeminiPD+ position, neatly coil ca-

ble slack and attach securely. 120 20120-105 Preliminary 6 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 2.5 Antenna The main transmitter antenna must be vehicle-

mounted to provide a separation distance of 50 cm or more from all persons and the antenna gain must not exceed 5dBi with a 1.6dB cable loss. 2.5.1 Recommended tools and supplies circle cutter, hole saw or socket punch for antenna Mini-UHF Crimp tool 2.5.2 Planning Referring to Figure 4, GeminiPD+ commonly uses three separate antennas:

T - Main transceiver -

Constraints are the limit of 50 cm (see section 2.5 above) and omni-directional factors R - Auxiliary receiver Constraints are the receiver spacing of at least 5/8 (wavelength) from transceiver antenna and omni-directional requirements G - Global Positioning System (GPS)*

Constraints are TX spacing of at least 24-

in/60.96 cm from all transmitting antennas and a clear view of the sky. For the optimum antenna spacing at the fre-

quency you are using, consult System Engi-

neering. For installation of ground-plane dependent antennas, the center of the metal surface used for mounting is preferable for best omni-

directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas, in-

stallation may be close to the edges of the sur-

face. The GeminiPD+ Lite model has no GPS. 5/8

(UHF: 18"/46cm 800MHz: 9"/23cm 900MHz: 8/21cm) R MPE 50cm 19.7in. T G 24in. Figure 4 - Antenna spacing Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

- Most preferred for all antennas: centerline of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position.

- Less preferred for receiver antenna: trunk lid, providing distance to transmitting an-

tenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed.

- Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fenders, just in back of rear window

- Least preferred, but permissible for re-

ceiver antenna: left or right front fenders, ahead of windshield Note:

Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual interfer-

ence especially at higher frequencies. 120 20120-105 Preliminary 7 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial cables

(e.g. RG-223) from each of the selected antenna positions to the position where the GeminiPD+ unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the connec-

tion. 3. At the GeminiPD+ position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the ap-

propriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connector. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-

UHF plug and connect to the left rear of GeminiPD+. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of GeminiPD+ to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS*

position below the auxiliary connector po-

sition. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the installa-

tion, tie-wrap together the auxiliary and the GPS* antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to correctly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing GeminiPD+:

Connect DC Power cables connector to GeminiPD+s until you hear a click as the two parts snap together. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal opera-

tion and to run the Radio Installation Software

(WinRIS) program for testing or trouble-

shooting. 2.7. Checking out Normal op-

eration Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1. Check for proper operation of the Gem-

iniPD+s LEDs as per Table 1 in section 3.1 2. Using the WinRIS program and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to confirm main antenna installation (as per section 4). 3. Using WinRIS, check the RF Data Link with a base station that can be heard (as per section 4.3.2. If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages.

* The GeminiPD+ Lite model has no GPS. 120 20120-105 Preliminary 8 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver (not installed on GeminiPD+ Lite model) Two LED indicators Three DE-9F RS232 ports The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS Gemini/PD PWR PGM RX TX PC/SETUP

0 0 0

. 2 DEV-3 DEV-2 DEV-1 6.000"

Figure 5 - Front and rear panels 120 20120-106 Preliminary 9 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide Table 1 - GeminiPD+ LEDs indications Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) GeminiPD+ LEDs indications PWR Red Amber Green Red Slow Red/Green Fast Red/Green RX / TX Red Off Off Off Red Red l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S Indication Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state PWR Green*

Amber*

Hardware failure Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) Indication No network activity Normal ready state Indication RX / TX Off 1 Pulse/sec. Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Receiving packets DBA sync allows transmit Amber Receiving packets DBA out-of-sync prevents transmit Red Transmitting

* For 800 & 900 MHz models (using duty cycle limit) :

PWR lit Green / Flashing Amber = normal indication (GPS 1pulse per sec.) PWR lit Amber / Flashing Green = exceeded duty cycle (GPS 1pps) We recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire ca-

ble with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance & ad-

justment as well to connect user applications. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 2 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term 1 OFF Alternates asserted, spacing dropped, marking Signal level

+3 to +15 V

-3 to -15 V 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports:

DE-9 F pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function DCD from GeminiPD+, normally asserted RXD data from GeminiPD+

TXD data to GeminiPD+

DTR to GeminiPD+, handshaking Ground DSR from GeminiPD+, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to GeminiPD+, handshaking CTS from GeminiPD+, handshaking AUX - auxiliary input to GeminiPD+, (at port 2: Officer requires assistance Alarm input) It may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external

+12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs. See Appendix A on page 18 for further details. 120 20120-106 Preliminary 10 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 4. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in performance is noted. 4.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect GeminiPD+ to the service monitor. WinRIS version 3.11 or later*

4.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. RF Data Link test between a Gemini and a base station. 6. GPS test (not required on GeminiPD+ Lite model).

- Refer to Table 3 and Table 4 for checks 1 to 5.

- Refer to paragraph 4.3.1 for check 6. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been recently calibrated and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation problems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done dur-

ing winter months

* To find out how to launch the Windows-based software alignment and system-testing tool WinRIS, please refer to the readme.txt file on the applications installation diskette. For functional details of the numerous buttons and menu-selectable items available, please refer to the programs context sensitive help. It is also possible to access the help information via the F1 key. 120 20120-106 Preliminary 11 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide Table 3 - Tests, Full Channel Units STEP ACTION CHECKLIST A EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

GeminiPD+ units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. 1 as per Table 1 - GeminiPD+ LEDs indications Power-up LED Sequence 2 Connect and save config Press WinRIS Get button 3 Main transceiver Output Power Press TX (Unmod) 4 Main transceiver Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) TX Deviation (in kHz) Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. RF Data Link test Use the addressing functions Send button to dynamically test transmissions as per WinRIS Help content UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts both +10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts (5 watts for 800MHz model) as per customer re-

quest Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line watt-

meter Refer to factory technical support.

< 5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng. 10W in-line watt-

meter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. 300 Hz Speed UHF 800 US 800 CA 3.5 48.0kb/s 5.0 3.5 4.1 4.1 43.2kb/s 5.1 3.6 3.6 32.0 kb/s 4.3 3.7 25.6 kb/s 4.0 3.7 19.2 kb/s 4.0 4.0 4.0 9.6 kb/s 3.0 3.0 3.0 Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. Service monitor set to read fre-

quency error Refer to factory technical support. Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Refer to factory technical support. Look for Delivery confirmed on the WinRIS Status bar. Refer to section 4.3.2 and to Win-

RIS Help content. Check on the WinRIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range (i.e. better than -107dBm) Refer to factory technical or support. Set the service monitor to generate at the unit antenna jack the RF levels mentioned below. The carrier generated should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation as per step 4 above. 7 Main Rec. RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm Aux Receiver repeat as per step 7

- 70 dBm +/-3

-110 dBm +/-3

-120 dBm +/- 3 WinRIS bar graph same as step 7 WinRIS bar graph The RSSI checks give a gen-

eral indication of receivers'

health Refer to factory technical support only if RX data per-

formance degradation is no-

ticed combined to out of tol-

erance RSSI readings. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model),35 watts (800MHz model) or 25W

(900MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 120 20120-106 Preliminary 12 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 5 4 5 6 8 Table 4 - Tests, Special & Half Channel Units STEP ACTION CHECKLIST B EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

GeminiPD+ units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. 1 as per Table 1 - GeminiPD+ LEDs indications Power-up LED Sequence 2 Connect and save config Press WinRIS Get button 3 Main transceiver Output Power1 Press TX (Unmod) 5 4 4 Main transceiver Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) TX Deviation (in kHz) Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. as per WinRIS Help content UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts 900MHz: 25 watts all +10%, -10%;

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per customer request Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line wattmeter Refer to factory technical support.

< 5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng. 10W in-line wattmeter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. Service monitor set to read frequency error Refer to factory technical support. Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Refer to factory technical support. 300 Hz Special channel unit xRC8FSK 28.8kb/s 24.0kb/s 21.6kbps xRC4FSK 19.2 kb/s 16.0 kb/s DGFSK 9.6 kb/s 8.0 kb/s 800 US

(NPSPAC) 900 US 3.2 3.4

2.8 3.4 3.7 800 US 900 US 2.1 2.4 800 US 2.5 2.5 2.1 2.4 900 US 2.5 2.5 Half channel unit xRC8FSK UHF 2.5 24.0kb/s 2.9 21.6kb/s xRC4FSK UHF 1.9 16.0 kb/s 14.4 kb/s 2.3 DGFSK UHF 2.5 9.6 kb/s 800 US 800 CA 2.5 2.9 2.5 2.9 800 US 800 CA 1.9 2.3 1.9 2.3 800 US 800 CA 2.5 2.5 8.0 kb/s 1.5 Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. 1.5 1.5 120 20120-106 Preliminary 13 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 5 6 RF Data Link test Use the base station address function and Send button to Look for Delivery confirmed on the WinRIS Status bar. Refer to section 4.3.2 and to WinRIS Help Check on the WinRIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range (i.e. better than -107dBm) or Refer to factory technical support. dynamically test the link Set the service monitor to generate at the unit antenna jack the RF levels mentioned below. The carrier generated content. should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation as per step 4 above. 7 Main Receiver RSSI checks

-70dBm, -110dBm, -120dBm

- 70 dBm +/-3 dB

-110 dBm +/-3 dB

-120 dBm +/- 3 dB 8 Aux. Receiver RSSI checks repeat as per step 7 same as in step 7 above WinRIS bar graph WinRIS bar graph The RSSI checks give a general indi-

cation of receivers' health Refer to factory technical support only if RX data performance degra-

dation is noticed combined to out of tolerance RSSI readings. 1

(unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model) , 35 watts (800MHz model) or 25W (900MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 120 20120-106 Preliminary 14 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 4.3 Additional test details 4.3.1 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the GeminiPD+ front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second.1 This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground posi-

tion solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital volt-

meter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS cable, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short cir-

cuit the GPS antenna is either a passive an-

tenna which is the WRONG type, or a defec-

tive active antenna, replace with a known good active antenna. 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait about three minutes for the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on GeminiPD+, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective 4.3.2 RF Data Link Test A link test between a mobile and a known base station can be done using the WinRIS "Address"

and "Send" functions. The Address and De-

vice fields, the Send button and the Chat message screen are used to send messages to specific mobile or base or to carry out RF test. Start by entering the address of the mobile (or base station) you wish to send a test message to or test:

1- Specify the address:

Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Address field in two ways:

- Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126.

- As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) ad-

dress, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN.

- The base address is usually: 1.

- The program may display one of the fol-

lowing messages on the status bar:

- For Paragon products:

address is not in AMN or number format

- For mobile products:

address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 2- Enter Device number of mobile/base station 3- Press the Send button. The Chat window reports Sent to xx mobile

(where xx is mobile name). If test is successful:

Status line reports Delivery confirmed. If test unsuccessful:

Chat window reports Waiting, Then the Status line reports Delivery Failed. 1 Lit green and flashing amber for the 800MHz & 900MHz models under duty cycle limit. 120 20120-106 Preliminary 15 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide 5. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Modes of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector UHF 403 - 460MHz1, 450 - 512 MHz 800 MHz TX 806 - 824 MHz, RX 851 - 869 MHz 12.5 or 25 kHz 900 MHz TX 896 - 902 MHz2, RX 935 - 941 MHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Half Duplex 16 internally stored, flash-EEPROM programmable 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external, Internal crowbar diode for reverse polarity protection

< 650 mA Standby (with GPS receiver)

< 15 A any, 5 MHz typical 45 MHz typical 39 MHz typical 7.1 D x 6.0 W x 2.0 H

< 4.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female GPS RX: SMA female (Not installed for GeminiPD+ Lite version) Interface connector 3x DE-9F D-subminiature RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Adjacent channel rejection

(Selectivity) Intermodulation rejection FM hum & noise ratio Spurious Response Rejection Conducted spurious

* psophometrically weighted filter TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle limit Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise ratio Attack time Operation

-116 dBm (< 0.35 V) *

75 dB @25 kHz, 65 @ 12.5 kHz 75 dB 40 dB @12.5 kHz, 45 dB @ 25 kHz *

80 dB

-57 dBm UHF = 10-40 watts 800 MHz = 10-35 watts 900 MHz = 10-25 watts 25% (800MHz) 33%(900MHz) @ full power, 30 secs. max. TX time (subject to FCC MPE limit)

-80 dBc 1.5 ppm 40dB @ 1.5 kHz deviation, 45 dB @ 3.0 kHz deviation

< 10 ms Half duplex 1 WARNING:

The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 901-902 MHz is reserved for use outside US/Canada. 2 WARNING:

120 20120-106 Preliminary 16 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide Data rates and Modulation type Packet Error Rate

(for < 1% error, with Parallel Decode, at Fc) TBD8FSK Protocol DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs Environmental MIL. spec. DGFSK (8000 b/s, 9600 b/s, 19200 b/s) SRRC4FSK (14400 b/s, 16000 b/s,19200b/s, 25600 b/s) RC4FSK (32000 b/s: GeminiPD+ only) xRC8FSK (48000 b/s, 43200 b/s,28800b/s, 24000 b/s,21600b/s: GeminiPD+ only ) UHF 800 MHz 900 MHz 112 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel 110 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel 107 dBm at 32000 b/s full channel TBD dBm at 24000 b/s half channel TBD dBm at 43200 b/s full channel TBD dBm at 48000 b/s full channel Dataradio Proprietary DBA with OOB AAVL support 112 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel 109 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel 107 dBm at 32000 b/s full channel 112 dBm at 16000 b/s NPSPAC channel TBD dBm at 28800 b/s NPSPAC channel TBD dBm at 48000 b/s full channel TBD at 16000 b/s half channel TBD at 14400 b/s half channel TBD at 9600 b/s half channel TBD at 8000 b/s half channel TBD dBm at 21600 b/s half channel TBD dBm at 24000 b/s half channel RX/TX, PWR Environment Categories MIL Spec. 810E Other Low Pressure High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Shock Operations Operations, Storage Operations, Storage Transfer of equipment Solar Radiation Rain1 Humidity1 Dust1 Vibration Shock Heat effects Drip rain Induced, Aggravated Blowing dust Ground Mobile Functional, Bench handling FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS FCC IC (DOC) UHF EOTGPDA 773195525A 800 MHz EOTGPDB 773195643A 900 MHz EOTGPD9 PENDING Procedure II I(A1), II I(C3), II (C1) I(AI,C2) Method 500.3 501.3 502.3 503.3 505.3 506.3 507.3 510.3 514.4 516.4 I II II,III I I(8) I,VI EMISSION DESIGNATORS kb/s Modulation DGMSK 19.2 DGMSK 16.0 DGMSK 9.6 8.0 DGMSK 32.0 RC4FSK 25.6 19.2 16.0 14.4 48.0 43.2 28.8 24.0 21.6 SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK xRC8FSK xRC8FSK xRC8FSK xRC8FSK xRC8FSK Bauds 19200 16000 9600 8000 16000 12800 9600 8000 7200 16000 14400 9600 8000 7200 IEC IP54 only II IEC IP54 EIA RS-204C Forestry EIA RS-204C UHF 15K0F1D 15K3FID 8K60FID

800MHz 15K0F1D 15K3F1D 8K60F1D

15K6F1D 16K5F1D 15K6F1D 15K6 / 11K5F1D 16K0 / 10K2F1D

8K17F1D 8K67F1D 17K0F1D 16K4F1D

8K17F1D 9K67F1D 10K0F1D 11K0F1D 14K7F1D 14K7F1D 11K2F1D 11K0F1D

900MHz

10K2F1D 8K75F1D

9K92F1D 10K7F1D 11K8F1D

10K2F1D 11K4F1D 11K8F1D 1 MIL Specification not guaranteed with GeminiPD Lite version. 120 20120-106 Preliminary 17 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide Appendix 1 - "Officer Requires Assistance" alarm function The contents of this appendix are also available as Technical Instruction Sheet 009 (TIS009), document part number 122 20110-009 dated December 20, 2000. Overview The DTE Port Interface pin 9 (AUX) on DEV-2 is used for the Officer Requires Assistance alarm function. Intended Audience This document is designed for use by System Integrators. Physical Connection This auxiliary input may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It can also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs (debounced for approximately 100 ms). Operation When using GeminiPD+ or GeminiPD+ Lite products, activating the Officer Requires Assistance alarm input starts emergency communications:

The modem creates DMP x or y messages. Any other pending message(s) will be failed to avoid delaying the alarm message on account of lower priority traffic and to remove non-emergency messages from duty-cycle manage-

ment (if applicable). In the case of a q message, a D-NAK* will be immediately returned. Base and Channel hunt will take place for the usual number of retries per base (according to configuration) but will cycle forever until D-ACKed1 or Reset1. Lack of base DBA synch will not prevent transmission to maximize the chance that a base gets the alarm signal. DBA Freewheel mode will be forced until the alarm is acknowl-

edged. 1 For details on DMP terms, refer to DMP 1.5 manual, version 4.0 120 20120-106 Preliminary 18 GeminiPD+ Installation Guide

 

 

GeminiPD Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 1.46 Preliminary For Internal Use Only The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2002 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. March, 2002 Part no.: 120 20110-146 Table of Contents 1. 2. 1.4.1 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 PRODUCT OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................. 1 1.2.2 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................... 1 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT ................................................................................................................................ 2 1.3 PRODUCT WARRANTY ...................................................................................................................................... 2 1.4 REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................................................................................................... 2 Factory Repair ........................................................................................................................................ 2 1.5 UNPACKING ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................... 3 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 3 2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 3 2.1.2 Location .................................................................................................................................................. 3 2.1.3 Cable Path............................................................................................................................................... 3 2.2 WARNINGS........................................................................................................................................................ 3 RF Radiation warning............................................................................................................................. 3 Interference with vehicular electronics................................................................................................... 3 Secure mounting...................................................................................................................................... 4 Explosive environments........................................................................................................................... 4 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. ................................................................................. 4 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT................................................................................................................................................. 4 Recommended tools and supplies............................................................................................................ 4 Physical mounting of GeminiPD............................................................................................................... 4 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................. 5 Electrical requirements........................................................................................................................... 5 Routing of power cable ........................................................................................................................... 5 2.5 ANTENNA ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 Recommended tools and supplies............................................................................................................ 7 Planning.................................................................................................................................................. 7 Antenna Installation................................................................................................................................ 8 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. ............................................................................................... 8 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 8 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................... 9 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS ................................................................................................................................... 9 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE ................................................................................................................................... 10 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels ............................................................................................................. 10 4. WINRIS PROGRAM....................................................................................................................................... 11 4.1 OPERATION..................................................................................................................................................... 11 4.2 TO CONNECT AND START WINRIS .................................................................................................................. 11 4.3 WINRIS WINDOW........................................................................................................................................... 12 4.4 PORT CONFIGURATION WINDOW .................................................................................................................... 13 4.5 FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................................................... 13 4.5.1 Station Reset button .......................................................................................................................... 13 4.5.2 Configuration to a file........................................................................................................................... 13 Get button ..................................................................................................................................................14 Get As button.............................................................................................................................................14 4.5.3 Configuration from a File ..................................................................................................................... 14 Put From button.........................................................................................................................................14 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 4.5.2.1 4.5.2.2 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.6. 2.7. 4.5.3.1 3.2.1 4.5.5 4.5.4 4.5.4.1 4.5.4.2 4.5.4.3 4.5.5.1 4.5.5.2 4.5.5.3 4.5.5.4 4.5.5.5 Special Functions.................................................................................................................................. 14 Banner Field..................................................................................................................................................14 Comments......................................................................................................................................................15 Password .......................................................................................................................................................15 Test Functions....................................................................................................................................... 15 DSR signal is High indicator.........................................................................................................................15 CTS signal is High indicator .........................................................................................................................16 Channel Selection..........................................................................................................................................16 RSSI & Power Out Indicators .......................................................................................................................16 TXON tests....................................................................................................................................................16 4.5.5.5.1 Unmodulated Carrier ................................................................................................................................16 4.5.5.5.2 Modulated Carrier ....................................................................................................................................17 Random Dataradio.........................................................................................................................................17 Square Wave .................................................................................................................................................17 Addressing and Test ......................................................................................................................................17 4.5.6 GPS Information ................................................................................................................................... 18 4.5.7 Status Bar.............................................................................................................................................. 18 TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING ..................................................................................................... 19 5.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ................................................................................................................................... 19 5.2 BASIC TESTS................................................................................................................................................... 19 5.3 GPS TEST....................................................................................................................................................... 19 SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................................................... 21 4.5.5.6 4.5.5.7 4.5.5.8 5. 6. FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS.................................................................................................... 5 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................................. 5 FIGURE 3 - DC POWER CONNECTOR.............................................................................................................................. 6 FIGURE 4 - ANTENNA SPACING....................................................................................................................................... 7 FIGURE 5 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS ............................................................................................................................ 9 TABLE 1 - GEMINIPD LEDS INDICATIONS.................................................................................................................... 10 TABLE 2 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS.............................................................................................................................. 10 TABLE 3 - CARRIER MODULATION............................................................................................................................... 17 TABLE 4 - TESTS, FULL & HALF CHANNEL UNITS ....................................................................................................... 20 APPENDIX 1 - "OFFICER REQUIRES ASSISTANCE" ALARM FUNCTION.................................................................... 23 120 20110-146 - Preliminary ii GeminiPD Installation Guide What's New in this version History Version 1.46 (Preliminary), March 2002 Following sections are amended to show the capability of 25.6 and 19.2kb/s bitrates in channels spaced at 12.5 kHz (half band or NPSPAC)

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications Version 1.45b (Preliminary, January 2002 Section 4 WinRIS rewritten Multiple minor changes to match revised Paragon and ParagonPD technical manuals Version 1.45a (Preliminary), December 2001 Removed IC class II permissive change note and updated data. Section 1.2.1 Features Table 3 Carrier Modulation Table 4 TX Deviation Version 1.44 (Preliminary), November 2001 Following sections are amended to show 32 kbps bitrates with RC4FSK modulation in 25kHz channel spacing bit rates for 800MHz band.

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation

- Table 5 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications, emission designators Version 1.43 (Preliminary), October 2001 Following sections are amended to show 32 kbps bitrates with RC4FSK modulation in 25kHz channel spacing bit rates.

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation

- Table 5 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications 120 20110-146 - Preliminary iii GeminiPD Installation Guide Version 1.42 (Preliminary), April 2001 Following sections are amended to show SRRC4FSK 12.5kHz channel spac-

ing bit rates.

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation

- Table 5 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications Version 1.41, March 2001 Section 2.5 Antenna and Figure 4 Antenna spacing amended to show FCCs RF Exposure Guidelines for increased Duty Cycle. Version 1.40, December 2000 Supporting footnotes for Gemini/PD Lite model (No GPS option) added. Section 3.2, function of DE-9F pin 9 (Aux input) corrected and clarified. Section 4.0, re-written to support the WinRIS program. Section 5.0, Table 5, step 4, values revised. Section 6.0, MIL Specifications limitations note added. Appendix 1, clarification of Officer Requires Assistance alarm function added. Version 1.32, October 2000 Updated UHF units specifications:

- Table 3 "Carrier Modulation"

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications. Version 1.31, August 2000 Introduction of 25.6 Kbps model. Relevant changes made to:

- Section 1.2.1 Features

- Table 3 Carrier Modulation"

- Table 4 Tests, Full & Half Channel Units

- Section 6 Specifications.

- Emission designators table added to Section 6 Specifications. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary iv GeminiPD Installation Guide Version 1.30, August 2000 Power output specifications for 800MHz model added to section 1.2.1 Features. Main transceiver Output Power for 800MHz model added to:

Table 4 Tests, Full and Half Channel Units and minimum value ed-

ited in the footnote. Title of section 4.4.4.2 edited to specify that RSSI Indicator also serves as power meter. Note added to establish that the internal wattmeter is not to be interpreted as a precision instrument. Section 4.4.4.3.1 Unmodulated Carrier edited to show 800MHz model power check nominal forward wattage. Section 2.4.2 Routing of Power Cable, step no. 7, clarification of negative wire connection. Version 1.20, June 2000:

LED indication explanation for the 800MHz (2% duty cycle limit) model added as a footnote to table 1 and to section 5.3 GPS Test. Section 2.5 Antenna rewritten and now including more details con-

cerning Planning and has a new antenna spacing drawing. More details added to section 4.2 concerning starting of the WinRIS program from MS-Windows. Environmental MIL spec added FCC Certification number added to Specifications section. Version 1.10, March 2000:

Addition of 800MHz specifications, revision to paragraph 2.2.1 - RF Radiation Warning and to paragraphs 2.5 through 2.5.3. Antenna in-

stallation. Version 1.0, January 2000:

First released version 120 20110-146 - Preliminary v GeminiPD Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU GeminiPD GeminiPD Lite HDX RS-232 Simplex WinRIS Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. GeminiPD Control Unit board High specs mobile radiomodem. PD = Parallel decode GeminiPD without GPS feature Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. A unit which uses the same frequency for transmit and receive. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configuration. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary vi GeminiPD Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the installation, operation and verification of the DATARADIO GeminiPD mobile radiomodem. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engi-

neering design, installation, and mainte-

nance personnel. 1.2 General Description GeminiPD is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usu-

ally from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief responses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. The GeminiPD is made-up of:

A main transceiver A auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode

(PD) A 40-Watt power amplifier (35-Watt for 800 MHz model), A GeminiPD Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem An optional integrated OEM GPS receiver.1 1 The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 1.2.1 Features One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology (patent pending) featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Automatic channel changing for im-

proved roaming capabilities. Builtin, up to 16-channel flash EEPROM programmable synthesized radio transceiver with automatic channel selection. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

- DGFSK2 modulation, rates of 9600 to 19200 b/s in 12.5 or 25 kHz channel spacing (9600 b/s maxi-

mum in half channels). or

xRC4FSK2 modulation, rates of 32.0, 25.6, and 19.2 kb/s in 25 kHz or 25.63, 19.2, 16.0, and 14.4 kb/s in 12.5 kHz channel spacing. 3 available user ports using standard RS-232 interface via built-in multi-

plexer. Half-duplex or simplex operation. Out-of-band signaling enables transmis-

sion of GPS1 reports with no effect on system performance. Back compatible with MobilPac/R

(DGFSK)2 at 9600 and 19200 b/s. 1.2.2 Configuration GeminiPD is factory configured based on each customer network system require-

2 Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. 3 NPSPAC only 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 1 GeminiPD Installation Guide ments, usually by Dataradio System Engi-

neering. Configuration is not changeable in the field without notifying Dataradio. Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 Email address: support@dataradio.com or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1.3 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.4 Replacement Parts This product is not field serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Spe-

cialized equipment and training is required to repair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service in-

formation before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may sug-

gest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.4.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact per-

son who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Informa-

tion about these charges is available from Technical Support. 1.5 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully un-

pack your GeminiPD kit (p/n 023 6000-001) shipping carton and identify each item as listed below:

One GeminiPD Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Installation mounting bracket 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 2 GeminiPD Installation Guide 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum position for GeminiPD and its antennas as well as the routing of all associ-

ated cabling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the GeminiPD unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna DE-9 connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling GeminiPD is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, win-

dows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that material can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of someone bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (ex-

haust pipes, mufflers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automo-

bile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive com-

puter modules, other electronic modules and ignition circuits to help prevent interference radio these components and between equipment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and be-

low or beneath the doors, channels through doors and window columns that are con-

venient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning The Federal Communications Commission

(FCC), with its action in the General Docket, 79-144, March 13, 1985, has adopted a safety standard for the human ex-

posure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC-regulated equip-

ment. Only proper installation of the trans-

ceiver antenna of GeminiPD as summarized in section 2.5 will result in user exposure substantially below the FCC recommended limits. Qualified personnel must do all antenna in-

stallations. See paragraph 2.5.2 for recom-

mended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals out-

side the vehicle are within two feet of the antenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protec-

tion from radio frequency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

- Electronic fuel injection systems

- Electronic anti-skid braking systems

- Electronic cruise control systems 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 3 GeminiPD Installation Guide If the installation vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform nor-

mally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount GeminiPD securely so that the unit will not break loose in case of an accident or violent maneuvers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

- Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as GeminiPD.

- Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or from the vehicle. Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. GeminiPD installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection As-

sociation Standard NFPA 58 which re-

quires:

Space containing radio equipment shall be isolated by a seal from the space containing the LP-gas container and its fittings.

- Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed ac-

cording the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of meas-

uring forward and reflected power at the operating frequency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of GeminiPD Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting GeminiPD to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the GeminiPD may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. GeminiPD is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid dam-

aging some vital part of the ve-

hicle such as fuel tanks, trans-

mission housing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws the mounting surface prior to in-

stallation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. extend below 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 4 GeminiPD Installation Guide After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. Do not overtighten self-

tapping screws. 1. Once you have found a suitable mount-

ing position for GeminiPD, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the position provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 2. Using the installation bracket as a tem-

plate, mark the four locations for drill-

ing (see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a cen-

ter punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting. 6. Securely mount GeminiPD to the in-

stalled bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements GeminiPD is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 15.0A. It will tolerate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system

(mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to iso-

late the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. Warnings:

Application of more than 16.3 VDC will damage GeminiPD and is not covered by the warranty. Always disconnect GeminiPDs DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting

(e.g. when jump starting the ve-

hicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles battery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manufacturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise ex-

treme caution throughout the installation and fit the fuse only when the installa-

tion is complete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power cable consists of three wires attached to 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 5 GeminiPD Installation Guide a Packard Electric Weather-Pack con-

nector (DC power Connector). The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to igni-

tion) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) 13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire) GROUND

(Blue wire) C B A SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE) IGNITION

(Small red wire) Figure 3 - DC Power Connector 3. Place this connector at GeminiPDs radio power input location. Do not connect at this time. See paragraph 2.6, Com-

pleting the physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be installed, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Secure the wires at several lo-

cations along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the positive lead at the battery positive terminal. Attach the negative wire at the vehicle end of the battery ground cable. If the negative cable is connected directly to the battery negative terminal, it should be fused in case of failure of the vehicles ground cable. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the connection will be made for switch sensing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have GeminiPD turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ignition key. Connect to Accessory if you wish GeminiPD to be available when the engine is not running, but still de-

pendent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the controlled-side of the ChargeGuard

(remembering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was required, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion com-

pound. Insert the fuse only when installa-

tion is complete and ready to test. 11. At the GeminiPD position, neatly coil cable slack and attach securely. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 6 GeminiPD Installation Guide 5/8

(UHF: 18"/46cm 800MHz: 9"/23cm) R MPE 50cm 19.7in. T G 24in. Figure 4 - Antenna spacing Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

- Most preferred for all antennas: center-

line of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position.

- Less preferred for receiver antenna:

trunk lid, providing distance to trans-

mitting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed.

- Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fend-

ers, just in back of rear window

- Least preferred, but permissible for re-

ceiver antenna: left or right front fend-

ers, ahead of windshield Note:

Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual inter-

ference especially at higher fre-

quencies. 2.5 Antenna To meet the FCCs RF Exposure Guide-

lines, the main transmitter antenna must be vehicle-mounted to provide a separation distance of 50 cm or more from all persons and the antenna gain must not exceed 5dB to satisfy RF exposure requirements. 2.5.1 Recommended tools and supplies circle cutter hole saw or Mini-UHF Crimp tool socket punch for antenna 2.5.2 Planning Referring to Figure 4, GeminiPD commonly uses three separate antennas:

T - Main transceiver -

Constraints are Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE on the drawing) lim-

its of 50 cm (as per see section 2.5 above) and omni-directional factors R - Auxiliary receiver Constraints are the receiver spacing of at least 5/8 (wavelength) from trans-

ceiver antenna and omni-directional re-

quirements G

(GPS)*

Constraints are TX spacing of at least 24-in/60.96 cm from all transmitting antennas and a clear view of the sky.

- Global Positioning System For the optimum antenna spacing at the fre-

quency you are using, consult System Engi-

neering. For installation of ground-plane dependent antennas, the center of the metal surface used for mounting is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas, installation may be close to the edges of the surface.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 7 GeminiPD Installation Guide Connect DC Power cables connector to GeminiPDs until you hear a click as the two parts snap together. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal op-

eration and to run the Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. 2.7. Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1. Check for proper operation of the GeminiPDs LEDs as per Table 1 in sec-

tion 3.1 2. Using the WinRIS program (described in section 4) and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to con-

firm main antenna installation. 3. Using the WinRIS, check the RF link with a base station that can be heard, see section 4.5.5 Test Functions. If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages.

* The GeminiPD Lite model has no GPS. 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial ca-

bles (e.g. RG-223) from each of the se-

lected antenna positions to the position where the GeminiPD unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the con-

nection. 3. At the GeminiPD position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-

UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connector. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-

UHF plug and connect to the left rear of GeminiPD. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of GeminiPD to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS* position below the auxiliary con-

nector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the in-

stallation, tie-wrap together the auxil-

iary and the GPS* antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to correctly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing GeminiPD:

120 20110-146 - Preliminary 8 GeminiPD Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver (not installed on GeminiPD Lite model) Two LED indicators Three DE-9F RS232 ports The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS Gemini/PD PWR PGM RX TX PC/SETUP

0 0 0 2

. DEV-3 DEV-2 DEV-1 6.000"

Figure 5 - Front and rear panels 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 9 GeminiPD Installation Guide Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) GeminiPD LEDs indications PWR Red Amber Green Red Slow Red/Green Fast Red/Green RX / TX Red Off Off Off Red Red l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S Indication Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state PWR Green*

Amber*

Hardware failure Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) Indication No network activity Normal ready state Indication RX / TX Off 1 Pulse/sec. Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Receiving packets DBA sync allows transmit Amber Receiving packets DBA out-of-sync prevents transmit Red Transmitting

* For 800MHz model (using 25% duty cycle limit) PWR lit Green / Flashing Amber = normal indication (GPS 1pulse per sec.) PWR lit Amber / Flashing Green = exceeded duty cycle (GPS 1pps) We recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire ca-

ble with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance & ad-

justment as well to connect user applications. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 2 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term 1 OFF Alternates asserted, spacing dropped, marking Signal level

+3 to +15 V

-3 to -15 V 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports:

DE-9 F pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function DCD from GeminiPD, normally asserted RXD data from GeminiPD TXD data to GeminiPD DTR to GeminiPD, handshaking Ground DSR from GeminiPD, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to GeminiPD, handshaking CTS from GeminiPD, handshaking AUX - auxiliary input to GeminiPD,

(for port 2: Officer requires assistance Alarm input) It may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external

+12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs. See Appendix A on page 23 for further details. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 10 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4. WinRIS program1 The Windows Radio Installation Software

(WinRIS) program is used to:

Check and troubleshoot GeminiPD. Save an existing configuration. Upload files for field-configuring units (Re-

quires intervention with technical support). To run the program, you will need:

A PC or portable computer running a 32-bit MS-

Windows application:

(Each program copyright Microsoft Corpora-

tion. All rights reserved.) Win ME Win2000 Win NT Win 9x

(For Win 95, if COMCTL32.DLL has been up-

dated to the most recent version and copied to the \windows\system\ directory). Note:

WinRIS does not operate under:

Win CE (embedded in PocketPC) 16-bit Windows 3.x

- A hard disk.

- An available COM port.

- A serial mouse, with its own driver installed is strongly recommend however most ac-

tions can also be done using keyboard command 4.1 Operation This support program can be run in MS-

Windows mode. DO NOT have more than one copy of this pro-

gram loaded at any given time in separate win-

dows. Doing so creates COM port sharing con-

flicts and failure to run the program alone re-

sults in unexpected transmissions. 1 For descriptions of features revised or added to Win-

RIS versions later than 3.xx, please refer to the pro-

grams context-sensitive help or type FI Only left mouse button operation is supported. Any command or selection shown in gray is ei-

ther unavailable or is awaiting another action before activating. Help in the program is available at all points by pressing the F1 key. If a subject is highlighted, the help displayed will be context sensitive. 4.2 To connect and start WinRIS Connect a suitable 9-conductor straight RS-232 cable, between front-mounted PC/Setup port and the RS-232 port of the PC or portable computer that will be running Gem-

ini.exe program. the units All families of MobilPac, GeminiPDs, Paragon and ParagonPD products share a common Win-

RIS program available on diskette, Dataradio p/n 980 03392-00n. Refer to the WinRIS Readme.txt file for details on how to set the MS-Windows environment, and how to connect, install and run this program. In summary, before starting the WinRIS when running MS-Windows, click on Start, then on

"Run". Type the relevant path and variables on the command line (or select by browsing) lead-

ing to:

WinRIS.EXE COM[x], [speed],8,n,1

(where x is the PC COM port to be used) Of course, the executable command may be used alone without any variable added. Click on OK. It is also possible to create a PC desktop short-

cut icon for WinRIS:

In MS-Windows 98 Start by right clicking anywhere on the desktop, Select New, 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 11 GeminiPD Installation Guide icon, Select Shortcut and type the path as detailed above directly on the command line (with or without variables). Click Next, Type in an applicable name for the shortcut Click Next Select an icon (your choice) and Click on Finish. In other MS-Windows Operating Systems, this procedure may vary slightly. If in doubt, check the manufacturers documentation. Command line settings override the environment variable, if any. Command line settings override the environment variable, if any. 4.3 WinRIS Window Refer to your version of WinRIS for its main screen appearance. WinRIS detects the product it is used with and the screens design adjusts to the products particular structure. Future ver-

sions will also introduce new features. The pro-

grams context-sensitive help (or accessible via the FI function key) is the best source of infor-

mation on items not covered in this section. Generally, this program uses only one main dis-

play screen. Placing the cursor over a Toolbar or Button generates a ScreenTip. Starting at the top, the screen display is made up of:

A Menu bar, containing the menu names listed below. They give access to command options. Unavailable commands are shown in light gray color. Shortcut keys are listed whenever available.

 File menu lists the:

- Put From command (Ctrl+O)

- Get command (Ctrl+S)

- Get As command and below a command separator, the:

- Exit command

 Test menu lists the:

- Stationreset command

- Modulated command

- UnModulated command

- Square Wave command

- Random Data command

 View menu lists the:

- Product ID command

- Password command

- Options command

- Toolbar checked command

- Status bar checked command

 Help menu lists the:

- Help Topics command and below a command separator, the:

- About WinRIS command A Toolbar row, located immediately below the menu bar containing buttons (each bearing an icon) for commonly used tasks as follows:

 Put From button

 Get button Get As button and to the right of a bar separator, the:

 About button and the

 Context-sensitive Help button An Indicator and Button bar, located im-

mediately below the Toolbar row, it con-

tains two circular indicators

 DSR signal is High indicator

 CTS signal is High indicator and buttons for commonly used tasks as follows.

 Station Reset button

 Product ID button

 Modulated TXON button

 Unmodulated TXON button

 Square Wave button

 Random Data button A Product field, displays product type be-

ing used after a connection to the product has been established A Data section, containing the Banner plus the Comments and Password fields and their related Put buttons. A Channel(s) section, to select and activate a channel. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 12 GeminiPD Installation Guide A Test section, with Address and Device fields, Send button and Chat window. A Status bar, for displaying standard user-

messages. Other messages appear in dialog window boxes or warning windows. A GPS Information section, exclusive to GeminiPD. An RSSI Bar Graph on the right side of the window is exclusive to GeminiPD. 4.4 Port Configuration Window At programs launch, WinRIS opens the Port Configuration window. Enter the COM port and speed that should be used. The program defaults to 8 bits, no parity and one stop bit. Make necessary modifica-

tion(s) to entries if needed and click on Save to go to main screen (a delay of several seconds may occur). If COM port and speed are already saved, the program automatically goes to the main screen. 1. In the COM Port list box, select the COM port (1,2,3 or 4) to use for connection. Note: the COM Ports selections numbered 5 to 32 are used (at factory) to upgrade sev-

eral units from the same computer USB port. 2. In the Baud rate list box, select the baud rate to use that matches your unit. 3. Bits options are 7 or 8 (default) 4. Parity options are None (default), odd or even 5. Stop bits options are 1 (default) or 2 Note:

Do not make any entry in the Connection Type --- Base Only box. It only applies to Paragon or ParagonPD base stations. 6. Click the Save button to validate your choice(s) and start the connecting process that concludes with the Status bar reporting:

Stationreset is completed. To exit the window without making any change, click on Cancel. Notes:

Enable the Always ask port configuration when WinRIS start box to have the Port Con-

figuration window always opening at start up. Two instances of WinRIS may be run. One ap-

plication runs on one COM port and the second on another port. This feature allows testing a mobile and a base station on one computer that has two COM ports. Ensure that mobile unit is in DMP mode. 4.5 Functions The WinRIS program is used to:

Save an existing configuration from a unit to Take a configuration from a file and upload a file. it to a unit Check GeminiPD Test and/or trouble-shoot installations 4.5.1 Station Reset button On the menu bar, select Test, then the Sta-

tionreset command or press the Stationreset button on the Toolbar to issue a stationreset command to the modem. Stationreset is a last step after doing a Put From. It causes downloaded parameters from a file or diskette to take effect in the connected unit. Pressing Stationreset is not required after doing any Comments or Password configuration change as these have their own Put Comments and Put Password buttons. StationReset does not break the connection. 4.5.2 Configuration to a file Saving the units configuration to a file allows the user to:

Subsequently restore the configuration. Safeguard a copy as documentation of the configuration. Note: The configuration and status files are ASCII files and may be e-mailed or faxed to technical support when requested to do so. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 13 GeminiPD Installation Guide Get button Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 4.5.2.1 On the menu bar, select File, then the Get command or press the Get button on the Toolbar to:

Download and automatically save the con-

nected units configuration setting to a file

(in the current directory of WinRIS) named with the unit' serial number: The WinRIS status bar will then report All parameters are successfully retrieved and saved in file

[unit' s/n].GM2. Any previous configuration in the program is overwritten. If you do not wish to overwrite an existing con-

figuration or prefer to name the file yourself, use the Get As button. Get As button 4.5.2.2 After communication is established using the Connect button, press the Get As button to:

Open the File, Save As window with the ASCII file *.gm2 (already selected). Warning:

Do not make any changes to these files. Any changes made to the configurations MUST be done at factory or by Dataradio system engineering. 4.5.3.1 1- On the menu bar, select File, then the Put Put From button From command or press the Put From button on the Toolbar. 2- In the Open window, locate the drive, di-

rectory and file name of the relevant file. This may be a configuration saved ear-

lier from a unit. It can also be from a Dataradio (factory or system engineering) diskette. 4- Select the appropriate file 5- Press the OK button. The status bar reports: [filename] is downloading into unit and up to 30 seconds later displays: All parameters are saved. Apply Station Reset to take effect! . 6- Press the Station Reset button. See section 4.5.1 for details. Save the connected units operating charac-

teristics (configuration setting) to a file, di-

rectory or drive of your choice. The program will ask before overwriting an existing file. Status bar reports All parameters are success-

fully retrieved and saved in [filename]. 4.5.3 Configuration from a File Loading a configuration from a file to a unit is useful to:

Restore the operating characteristics of a unit (Requires intervention with technical support.) Carry out field updates using Dataradio system engineering supplied diskette(s). 4.5.4 Special Functions The following WinRIS fields and buttons are used to gather specific information concerning the connected unit:

Banner field Comments field and Put Comments button Password and Put Password button Banner Field 4.5.4.1 This field displays a string made up of the serial number of the connected unit followed by the firmwares used and their version number. Format is:

[serial number]:firmware 1 name, its version #, firmware 2 name, its version #. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 14 GeminiPD Installation Guide The serial number portion uniquely identifies the unit. It is a variable length, maximum eight-

character alphabetic string assigned at the time of manufacture. It is identical to the serial num-

ber printed on the label of the unit. This number cannot be changed and is used as part of the on-

air protocol. GeminiPD's firmwares resides in flash EPROM and are designed to allow field upgrades. When contacting your supplier, give the full banner string and the version of the WinRIS used. You will find the version number by se-

lecting the Help menu option, then About WinRIS command or pressing the About button on the Toolbar. The Banner field is blank prior to doing a

"Get", "Get As" or "Put From". Comments 4.5.4.2 1- Type comments directly in the Comments field. These can be text up to 24 characters. Use this field to enter user-convenient de-

scription(s) (customer name, location, etc). 2- Press the button Put Comments to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field displays entered comments. If no comment was entered, the field will remain blank. Password 4.5.4.3 The password feature is useful where two (or more) fleets share the same radio channel. Mo-

biles without the proper password would still receive the message but the contents would not be intelligible. 1- Type your password directly in the Pass-

word field. It is a string of 32 hexadecimal characters (exactly). 2- Press the button Put Password to make the entry permanent. This field may be left blank. On subsequent Get, Get As or Put From, this field will require that the correct password be entered. If none was entered, the field will remain blank. Password information is NOT retrieved and saved to a file, along with the configuration. Clearing a Password is done by entering 32 zeros. The Dataradio supplied password algorithm is designed to thwart the casual observer only. It provides a limited form of data privacy. There-

fore, if your security requirements are high, Dataradio urges you to use external encryption technology (such as Data Encryption Standard

(DES)) in the Host and Mobiles computers. 4.5.5 Test Functions The following WinRIS functions and buttons are used to carry out testing or trouble-shooting on a connected unit:

DSR signal is High indicator CTS signal is High indicator Channels select Show All Channel Frequencies RSSI Indicator TXON (Modulated) TXON (Unmodulated) Square Wave Random Data Addressing and Device fields 4.5.5.1 DSR signal is High indicator The Data Set Ready (DSR) indicator light, located on the button bar (leftmost), is an RS-

232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indi-

cates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used requires that DSR be normally asserted. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 15 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4.5.5.2 CTS signal is High indicator The Clear-to-Send (CTS) indicator light, lo-

cated on the button bar (second indicator from the left), is an RS-232 protocol port indication. When lit, it indicates proper connection and that the value is High. The DMP protocol used re-

quires that CTS be normally asserted. 4.5.5.3 Channel Selection Select the radio channel on which you wish to send a test transmission by clicking the relevant available option button. The program automatically detects which of sixteen channels are present on the connected unit. For each factory-set channel available, the relevant round option button and channel num-

ber is enabled (black). For each unavailable channel, the round option button and channel number appears disabled (grayed-out). Only one channel at a time may be selected. Pressing the Show All Channel Frequencies button opens a sub-window listing in tabular form the radio transmitting and receiving fre-

quencies programmed for each available chan-

nel(s). To exit this sub-window, press the upper right corner system box. 4.5.5.4 RSSI & Power Out Indicators The Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) bar graph usually displays in twin-columns the rela-

tive strength (in dBm) of an incoming RF signal on the selected channel. The left column indication, labeled "I", shows the transceiver RX signal (rear mini-UHF con-

nector). The right column indication, labeled "II", shows the auxiliary RX signal (front mini-UHF con-

nector). Meter precision is usually better than 3 dBm

(see note at the end of this section). This indicator functions as a single column

"Power" (Watt) meter when using either of the test functions: "TXON (Modulated)", "TXON

(Unmodulated)", Square Wave or Random Data with a range of 0 to 60 watts. Precision is usually better than +/-3 watts. Note:

These internal RSSI and wattmeter indi-

cators are designed for use as conven-

ient and general reference only (trend monitoring). Their readings are not to be considered a substitute for values obtained using a standard external pre-

cision measuring instrument. Whenever faced with a pass/fail situa-

tion, always base a decision on an ex-

ternal RF instrument measurement. It is good practice at the time of instal-

lation to record (for future reference) the WinRIS RF power meter reading as well as readings from a standard power meter (e.g. Bird, IFR COM120 etc.). TXON tests 4.5.5.5 TXON test functions are selected by choosing Test from the file menu, then Modulated, Unmodulated, Random or Square Wave command or by pressing the relevant button on the Toolbar. All other commands and buttons are inactive during test transmissions. Unmodulated Carrier 4.5.5.5.1 Unmodulated carrier gives a clear carrier and is frequently used for checking:

Frequency error Forward and reverse power Press the TXON (Unmodulated) button to transmit an unmodulated 20-seconds test signal on the channel selected or until the button is pressed again. The functions of all the other buttons are inop-

erative during test transmissions. Power check:

1- Connect an in-line power meter between the radio and the antenna. Measure the forward and the reflected power levels by powering TX ON. Reflected power should be <5% of forward power (or as speci-

fied by System Eng.). 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 16 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4.5.5.5.2 Modulated Carrier Test transmission generates a carrier modulated with 1kHz sinewave, at deviation level that de-

pends on model and network speed as indicated in Table 3 below. This function is frequently used for checking frequency deviation. Press the TXON (Modulated) button to begin transmitting a 20-seconds modulated test signal on the channel or until the button is pressed again. Table 3 - Carrier Modulation Carrier Modulation Full Channel Network Speed 32000 RC4FSK C R R S K S F 4 K S M G D 25600 19200 19200 16000 Typical Deviation 4.01) / 3.62) kHz 4.01) / 3.72) kHz 4.51) / 4.32) kHz 4.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 9600 Half Channel Network Speed 25600 C R R S K S F 4 DGMSK 19200 16000 14400 9600 Typical Deviation 2.12) kHz 1.51) / 2.22) kHz 1.61) / 2.42) kHz 2.01) / 2.82) kHz 2.5 kHz Random Dataradio Different modulation types are not interoperable 1) UHF model and Canada market 2) 800MHz model 4.5.5.6 Generates a 20-seconds random data signal. Pressing the Stop button halts the ongoing test. This test function is used for checking low-

frequency balance. Low-frequency balance check:

Helps to determine if the radio transmitter is well balanced for data transmission. Refer to Table 4 for values indicated in adjust-

ment tables under Low Frequency Balance step. Random data test requires the use of an IFR COM-120B service monitor with option 03:

30KHz IF filter and its DC coupled demodulator output selected. 4.5.5.7 Generates a 20-seconds 100 Hz square wave used for low-frequency balance adjustments. Square Wave Addressing and Test 4.5.5.8 The Address and Device fields, the Send button and the Chat message screen are used to send messages to specific mobile or base or to carry out RF test. Start by entering the address of the mobile (or base station) you wish to send a test message to or test:

1- Specify the address:

Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Address field in two ways:

- Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126.

- As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) ad-

dress, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN.

- The base address is usually: 1.

- The program may display one of the fol-

lowing messages on the status bar:

- For Paragon products:

address is not in AMN or number for-

mat

- For mobile products:

address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid format and correctly typed. 2- Enter the Device number for mobile (or base station). 3- Press the Send button. The Chat window reports Sent to xx mobile

(where xx is mobile name). If test is successful:

Status line reports Delivery confirmed. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 17 GeminiPD Installation Guide 4.5.7 Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom edge of the WinRIS window. To display or hide the bar, check or uncheck the command in the View menu. The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you navigate using the direc-

tional arrows. This area also shows messages describing actions of toolbar buttons as you de-

press them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button. Warning and Caution messages appear in pop-

up sub-windows. To close these message boxes, press the ESC key. Three boxes on the right of the status bar indi-

cate which of the following keys is latched down CAP, NUM or SCRL. If test unsuccessful:

Chat window reports Waiting, Then the Status line reports Delivery Failed. 4.5.6 GPS Information When connected to a Gemini/PD (except Lite model) and decoding a valid GPS input signal, this window presents global position in Lati-

tude, Longitude and Altitude. A green light indicates valid GPS data is dis-

played. A red light indicates the GPS data is either old or not enough satellites signals are present to achieve valid location computation. Position information is displayed in degrees, minutes and decimal fractions of a minute:

E.g. : Latitude of 45 degrees, 29 minutes and 15 seconds North would appear as:

4529.250 N under DCF 1.0 4529.2500 N under DCF 2.0 The Altitude field indicates height above the WGS-84 *1 reference ellipsoid in meters with a range of 30000.00 to + 30000.00 Notes:

The number of satellites field indicates the number of satellite signals being received and used to calculate position. When no GPS signal is present, the location indicators display the word Invalid and the #

of Satellites indicates 0. The Dataradio Compressed Format (DCF) for GPS messages (DCF v. 1.0 and 2.0 are sup-

ported) is used to transmit the GPS information along with the DMP data payload. Program-

mers who need to decode the compressed infor-

mation for their applications may contact Data-

radio System Engineering for further informa-

tion. Altitude is not displayed in DCF version 1.0 1 WGS- 84 = World Geodetic System - 1984 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 18 GeminiPD Installation Guide 5. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in performance is noted. 5.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect GeminiPD to the service monitor. 5.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. Link test between Gemini and the base sta-

6. GPS test (not required on GeminiPD Lite tion. model). Refer to Table 4 for checks 1 to 5. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation prob-

lems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months Refer to the WinRIS section for function details 5.3 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the GeminiPD front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second.1 This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground posi-

tion solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital volt-

meter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS cable, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short cir-

cuit the GPS antenna is either a passive an-

tenna which is the WRONG type, or a defec-

tive active antenna, replace with a known good active antenna. 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait about three minutes for the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on GeminiPD, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 19 GeminiPD Installation Guide 1 Lit green and flashing amber for the 800MHz model un-

der 2% duty cycle limit. Table 4 - Tests, Full & Half Channel Units CHECKLIST ACTION STEP GeminiPD units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. 1 as per Table 1 - GeminiPD LEDs indications EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

2 Power-up LED Sequence Connect and save con-

fig Press WinRIS Get button 3 Main transceiver Out-

put Power Press TX (Unmod) 4 Main transceiver Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) 4 TX Deviation (KHz) 5 Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts both +10%, -10%

Factory-settable down to 10 watts (5 watts for 800MHz model) as per customer request as per section 4.5.2 Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line wattmeter Refer to factory technical support.

<5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng. 10W in-line wattmeter Check for bad connec-

tions, damaged coax cable, etc. 300 Hz Service monitor set to read frequency error Refer to factory technical support. Full channel unit xRC4FSK UHF 800 US 800 CA Speed\

4.0 32.0 kb/s 25.6 kb/s 4.0 19.2 kb/s 4.5 3.6 3.7 4.5 3.6 3.7 4.5 Half channel unit

25.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 1.5 16.0 kb/s 1.6 14.4 kb/s: 2.0 DGFSK 19.2 kb/s 4.0 16.0 kb/s 4.0 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.8

1.5 1.6 2.0 Full channel unit 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 Half channel unit 9.6 kb/s 2.5 2.5 Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. 2.5 5 RF Link test Use the addressing func-

tions Send button to dy-

namically test transmissions Delivery confirmed on the Look for Status bar Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Refer to factory technical support. as per section 4.5.5.8 Check on the WinRIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range (i.e. better than -107dBm) or Refer to factory technical support. 6 Set the service monitor to generate at the levels mentioned below. The carrier generated should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation of +/- 4.0kHz (full ch.) or +/-2.5kHz (half ch.). 7 Main Rec. RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm Aux Receiver repeat as per step 7 8

- 70 dBm +/-3

-110 dBm +/-3

-120 dBm +/- 3 WinRIS bar graph same as step 7 WinRIS bar graph Refer to factory technical support. The RSSI checks give a good indication of re-

ceivers' health. Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model) or 35 watts (800MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 20 GeminiPD Installation Guide 6. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Tx Frequency Rx Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Modes of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector Interface connector RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Selectivity (25KHz) Selectivity (12.5) Intermodulation Spurious rejection FM hum & noise Conducted spurious

* psophometrically weighted filter UHF 403 - 512 MHz1 403 - 512 MHz 1 800 MHz 806 824 MHz (821-824) 851 869 MHz (866-869) 12.5 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Simplex or Half Duplex 16 internally stored 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external 2 & 4 Amp fuse internal

< 550 mA Standby (with auxiliary receiver)

< 15 A 5 MHz typical 7.050 D x 6.000 W x 2.0000 H

< 3.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female GPS RX: SMA female (Not installed for GeminiPD Lite version) 3x DE-9F D-subminiature

< 0.35 V *

75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 65 dB typical 60 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum

-45 dB typical *

< -57 dBm 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 21 GeminiPD Installation Guide TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise Attack time Operation Data rates and Modulation type Packet Error Rate

(for < 1% error) UHF = 10-40 watts 20% @ full power, 30 secs. max. TX time (subject to FCC MPE limit) 800 MHz = 5-35 watts

-75 dBc (-38 dBm @10 W) typical 1.5 ppm

-45 dB max (25 kHz)

< 10 ms Simplex/half duplex DGFSK (9600 b/s), (19200 b/s) *

SRRC4FSK (19200 b/s), (25600 b/s) *

better than 112 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel, with P/D (DGFSK)*

better than 110 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK - UHF)*

better than 109 dBm at 25600 b/s full channel, with P/D (SRRC4FSK 800MHz)*

Dataradio Proprietary DBA Protocol

* Networks must use common modulation, bit and baud rates. Different types are not on-air compatible DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs RX/TX, PWR Environmental MIL. spec. Environment Categories MIL Spec. 810E Other Low Pressure High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Shock Solar Radiation Rain1 Humidity1 Dust1 Vibration Shock Operations Operations, Storage Operations, Storage Transfer of equipment Heat effects Drip rain Induced, Aggravated Blowing dust Ground Mobile Functional, Bench handling Method 500.3 501.3 502.3 503.3 505.3 506.3 507.3 510.3 514.4 516.4 Procedure II I(A1), II I(C3), II (C1) I(AI,C2) I II II,III I I(8) I,VI IEC IP54 only II IEC IP54 EIA RS-204C Forestry EIA RS-204C FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS UHF FCC IC (DOC) EOTGPDA 773195525A 800 MHz EOTGPDB 773195643A Baud rate EMISSION DESIGNATORS Bit rate 9600 16000 19200 19200 9600 16000 19200 9600 25600 16000 14400 32000 12800 8000 7200 16000 Modulation DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK RC4FSK UHF 8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID TBD 15K6F1D

8K17F1D 8K67F1D 16K5F1D 800MHz 8K60FID 15K3FID 15K0FID 16K0FID 10K2F1D 15K6FID 11K5F1D 10K0F1D 11K0F1D 15K6F1D 1 MIL Specification not guaranteed with GeminiPD Lite version. 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 22 GeminiPD Installation Guide Appendix 1 - "Officer Requires Assistance" alarm function The contents of this appendix are also available as Technical Instruction Sheet 009 (TIS009), document part number 122 20110-009 dated December 20, 2000. Overview The DTE Port Interface pin 9 (AUX) on DEV-2 is used for the Officer Requires Assistance alarm function. Intended Audience This document is designed for use by System Integrators. Physical Connection This auxiliary input may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It can also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs (debounced for approximately 100 ms). Operation When using GeminiPD or GeminiPD Lite products, activating the Officer Requires Assistance alarm input starts emergency communications:

The modem creates DMP x or y messages. Any other pending message(s) will be failed to avoid delaying the alarm message on account of lower priority traffic and to remove non-emergency messages from duty-cycle manage-

ment (if applicable). In the case of a q message, a D-NAK* will be immediately returned. Base and Channel hunt will take place for the usual number of retries per base (according to configuration) but will cycle forever until D-ACKed1 or Reset1. Lack of base DBA synch will not prevent transmission to maximize the chance that a base gets the alarm signal. DBA Freewheel mode will be forced until the alarm is acknowl-

edged. 1 For details on DMP terms, refer to DMP 1.5 manual, version 4.0 120 20110-146 - Preliminary 23 GeminiPD Installation Guide

 

 

G3 Narrow band Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 1.00

(Preliminary) The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2004 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. April, 2004 Part no.: 122 20130- 00A Table of Contents 2. 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW...................................................................................................................................6 INTENDED AUDIENCE........................................................................................................................................6 1.1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................................................6 1.2.1 Features...................................................................................................................................................7 1.2.2 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................7 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................8 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................................8 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS .......................................................................................................................................8 1.5.1 Factory Repair.........................................................................................................................................8 1.6 UNPACKING.......................................................................................................................................................9 INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................................9 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................................9 2.1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................9 2.1.2 Location...................................................................................................................................................9 2.1.3 Cable Path ...............................................................................................................................................9 2.2 WARNINGS......................................................................................................................................................10 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning ...........................................................................................................................10 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics .................................................................................................10 2.2.3 Secure mounting ....................................................................................................................................10 2.2.4 Explosive environments .........................................................................................................................10 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas..................................................................................10 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT...............................................................................................................................................11 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies ..........................................................................................................11 2.3.2 Physical mounting of G3........................................................................................................................11 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................12 2.4.1 Electrical requirements .........................................................................................................................12 2.4.2 Routing of power cable..........................................................................................................................12 2.5 ANTENNA........................................................................................................................................................13 2.5.1 Recommended tools and supplies ..........................................................................................................13 2.5.2 Planning ................................................................................................................................................14 2.5.3 Antenna Installation ..............................................................................................................................15 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. .............................................................................................15 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION..........................................................................................................15 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................16 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS ..................................................................................................................................16 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE ....................................................................................................................................17 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels..............................................................................................................17 4. TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING .....................................................................................................18 4.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED....................................................................................................................................18 4.2 BASIC TESTS ...................................................................................................................................................18 4.3 ADDITIONAL TEST DETAILS .............................................................................................................................20 4.3.1 TX Deviation..........................................................................................................................................20 4.3.2 GPS Test ................................................................................................................................................20 4.3.3 RF Data Link Test..................................................................................................................................21 SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................................................................................................22 2.6. 2.7. 5. 122 20130-00A 2 G3 Installation Guide FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................11 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................12 FIGURE 3 - DC POWER CONNECTOR.............................................................................................................................12 FIGURE 4 - ANTENNA SPACING .....................................................................................................................................14 FIGURE 5 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS...........................................................................................................................16 TABLE 1 - G3 LEDS INDICATIONS ................................................................................................................................17 TABLE 2 - DTE PORT PIN FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................................17 TABLE 3 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS ..............................................................................................................................17 TABLE 4 TEST CHECKLIST .........................................................................................................................................19 TABLE 5 - TX DEVIATION ............................................................................................................................................20 122 20130-00A 3 G3 Installation Guide What's New in this version History Version 1.00 Prelim, April 2004 reports. Introduction of narrow band G3 product. Released as part of FCC 122 20130-00A 4 G3 Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU-III G3 HDX RS-232 WinRIS Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. Gemini (G3) Control Unit board Third generation of Gemini/PD products. Runs up to 64 kb/s in 25kHz channel. Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configuration. 122 20130-00A 5 G3 Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the installation, operation, and verification of the DATARADIO G3. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engineering design, installation, and maintenance personnel. General Description 1.2 G3 is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usually from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief responses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. G3 is made-up of:

A main transceiver An auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode (PD) A power amplifier (40-Watt for UHF, 35-Watt for 800 MHz, 25-Watt for 900MHz models) A Gemini Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem An integrated OEM GPS receiver.1 1 The Gemini PD+ Lite model has no GPS. 122 20130-00A 6 G3 Installation Guide 1.2.1 Features One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-

path and fading environments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Automatic channel changing for improved roaming capabilities. Builtin, up to 16-channel flash-programmable synthesized radio transceiver with automatic channel selection. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

Modulation type SRC16FSK SRC8FSK 12.5 kHz TBD TBD 21.6 kb/s 24.0 kb/s Channel spacing NPSPAC & 900 MHz TBD TBD 24.0 kb/s 28.8 kb/s 25 kHz 64 kb/s 57.6 kb/s 43.2 kb/s 48 kb/s One Ethernet port Two available user ports using standard RS-232 interface via built-in multiplexer. One USB port Half-duplex operation. Out-of-band signaling enables transmission of GPS reports with no effect on system performance. Next generation high efficiency airlink E-DBA protocol 1.2.2 Configuration G3 is factory configured based on each customer network system requirements, usually by Dataradio System Engineering. Configuration is not changeable in the field without notifying Dataradio. 122 20130-00A 7 G3 Installation Guide 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone:

fax:

Email address: support@dataradio.com

+1 514 737-0020

+1 514 737-7883 DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone:

fax:

Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1 770 392-0002 1 770 392-9199 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is not field-serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Specialized equipment and training is required to repair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service information before returning equipment. A Technical Support rep-

resentative may suggest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) num-

ber. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact person, who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of war-

ranty will be subject to service charges. Information about these charges is available from Technical Sup-

port. 122 20130-00A 8 G3 Installation Guide 1.6 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully unpack your G3 kit (p/n 023 6000-101) shipping carton and iden-

tify each item as listed below:

Installation mounting bracket One G3 Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum po-

sition for G3 and its antennas as well as the routing of all associated cabling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the G3 unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling G3 is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, windows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that material can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of someone bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (exhaust pipes, muf-

flers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automobile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive computer modules, other electronic modules and ignition circuits to help prevent interference between these components and radio equipment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and below or beneath the doors, channels through doors and window columns that are convenient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 122 20130-00A 9 G3 Installation Guide 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning Recommended safety guidelines for the human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy are contained in the Canadian Safety Code 6 and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Bulletin 65. Proper installation of the transceiver antenna of G3 as summarized in section 2.5 will result in user exposure substantially below the recommended limits for the general public. Qualified personnel must do all antenna installations. See paragraph 2.5.2 for recommended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals outside the vehicle are within two feet of the antenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protection from radio fre-

quency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

Electronic fuel injection systems Electronic anti-skid braking systems Electronic cruise control systems If the installation vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform normally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount G3 securely so that the unit will not break loose in case of an acci-

dent or violent maneuvers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as G3. Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

from the vehicle. a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. G3 installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection As-

sociation Standard NFPA 58 which requires:

Space containing radio equipment shall be isolated by a seal from the space containing the LP-gas container and its fittings. Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. 122 20130-00A 10 G3 Installation Guide The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed according the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of measuring forward and reflected power at the operating fre-

quency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of G3 a) Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting G3 to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. b) Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the G3 may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. c) G3 is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid damaging some vital part of the vehi-

cle such as fuel tanks, transmission housing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws extend below the mounting surface prior to installation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. Do not overtighten self-tapping screws. 1. Once you have found a suitable mounting position for G3, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the position provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 2. Using the installation bracket as a template, mark the four locations for drilling (see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a center punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. 122 20130-00A 11 G3 Installation Guide Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting (see Figure 2). 6. Securely mount G3 to the installed bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements G3 is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 12.0A. It will tolerate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system (mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to isolate the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. Warnings:

Always disconnect G3s DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting (e.g. when jump starting the vehicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles battery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manufacturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise extreme caution throughout the installation and fit the fuse only when the installation is complete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power cable consists of three wires attached to a Packard Electric Weather-Pack connector (DC power Connector, see Figure 3). Figure 3 - DC Power Connector SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE) 13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire) GROUND

(Blue wire) C B A IGNITION

(Small red wire) The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to ignition) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) 122 20130-00A 12 G3 Installation Guide nition key. 3. Place this connector at G3s radio power input location. Do not connect at this time. See paragraph 2.6, Completing the physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be installed, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Se-

cure the wires at several locations along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the positive lead at the battery positive terminal. Attach the negative wire at the vehicle end of the battery ground cable. If the negative cable is connected directly to the battery negative terminal, it should be fused in case of failure of the vehicles ground cable. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the connection will be made for switch sensing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have G3 turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ig-

Connect to Accessory if you wish G3 to be available when the engine is not running, but still dependent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the controlled-side of the Char-

geGuard (remembering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was required, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion compound. Insert the fuse only when installation is complete and ready to test. 11. At the G3 position, neatly coil cable slack and attach securely. 2.5 Antenna The main transmitter antenna must be vehicle-mounted to provide a separation distance of 50 cm or more from all persons and the antenna gain must not exceed 5dBi (with a 1.6dB cable loss). 2.5.1 Recommended tools and supplies circle cutter, hole saw or socket punch for antenna Mini-UHF Crimp tool 122 20130-00A 13 G3 Installation Guide 2.5.2 Planning Referring to Figure 4, G3 commonly uses three separate antennas:

T - Main transceiver -

Constraints are the limit of 50 cm (see section 2.5 above) and omni-directional factors R - Auxiliary receiver Constraints are the receiver spacing of at least 5/8 (wavelength) from transceiver antenna and omni-

directional requirements G - Global Positioning System (GPS) Constraints are TX spacing of at least 24-in/60.96 cm from all transmitting antennas and a clear view of the sky. 5/8

(UHF: 18"/46cm 800MHz: 9"/23cm 900MHz: 8/21cm) R MPE 50cm 19.7in. T G 24in. Figure 4 - Antenna spacing For the optimum antenna spacing at the frequency you are using, consult System Engineering. For installation of ground-plane dependent antennas, the center of the metal surface used for mounting is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas, installation may be close to the edges of the surface. Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

Most preferred for all antennas: centerline of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position. Less preferred for receiver antenna: trunk lid, providing distance to transmitting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed. Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fenders, just in back of rear window Least preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right front fenders, ahead of windshield Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual interference especially at higher frequen-

cies. 122 20130-00A 14 G3 Installation Guide 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial cables (e.g. RG-223) from each of the selected antenna positions to the position where the G3 unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the connection. 3. At the G3 position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connector. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the left rear of G3. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of G3 to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS* position below the auxiliary connector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the installation, tie-wrap to-

gether the auxiliary and the GPS antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to correctly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing G3:

Connect DC Power cables connector to G3s until you hear a click as the two parts snap to-

gether. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal operation and to run the Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. 2.7. Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1. Check for proper operation of the G3s LEDs as per Table 1 on page 17. 2. Using the WinRIS program and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to confirm main antenna installation (as per section 4). 3. Using WinRIS, check the RF Data Link with a base station that can be heard (see section 4.3.3). If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal se-

quence of transmitting and receiving messages. 122 20130-00A 15 G3 Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver (not installed on G3 Lite model) Three LED indicators Two DE-9F RS232 ports One Ethernet 10/100BaseT port One USB port (future use) The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS G3 PWR PGM RX TX LNK ACT

0 0 0

. 2 USB DEV-2 DEV-1 ETH 6.000"

Figure 5 - Front and rear panels 122 20130-00A 16 G3 Installation Guide Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) RX / TX PWR Table 1 - G3 LEDs indications G3 LEDs indications Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) PWR Indication RX / TX Indication Green*

Normal ready state Off No network activity Amber*

1 Pulse per sec (1 pps) Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Receiving packets DBA sync allows transmit Indication Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state Hardware failure Missing DSP RSSI calibration Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress Amber Receiving packets DBA out-of-sync prevents transmit Red Transmitting

* For 800 & 900 MHz US models (using Transmit duty cycle limit firmware) :

- PWR lit Green = normal indication or Flashing Amber = normal + 1pps

- PWR lit Amber = exceeded duty-cycle or Flashing Green = exceeded d-c + 1pps Red Red Amber Green Red flashing Red Slow Red/Green Fast Red/Green Off Off Off

Red Red l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports, we recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire cable with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance, & adjustment as well to connect user applications. Table 2 - DTE port pin functions DE-9 F pin # Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD from G3, normally asserted RXD data from G3 TXD data to G3 DTR to G3, handshaking Ground DSR from G3, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to G3, handshaking CTS from G3, handshaking AUX - auxiliary input to G3, (for port 2: Officer requires assistance Alarm input) It may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs. See Appendix A on page 24 for further details. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 3 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term ON OFF Alternates asserted, spacing dropped, marking Signal level

+3 to +15 V

-3 to -15 V 122 20130-00A 17 G3 Installation Guide 4. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in per-

formance is noted. 4.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect G3 to the service monitor. WinRIS version 4.0 or later*

4.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. RF Data Link test between a Gemini and a base station. 6. GPS test (not required on G3 Lite model).

- For checks 1 to 5, refer to Table 4 Test Checklist below.

- For check 6, refer to paragraph 4.3.2 - GPS Test. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been recently calibrated and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation problems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field ser-

vice is done during winter months

* To find out how to launch the Windows-based software alignment and system-testing tool WinRIS, please refer to the readme.txt file on the applications installation diskette. For functional details of the numerous buttons and menu-selectable items available, please refer to the programs context sensitive help. It is also possible to access the help information via the F1 key. 122 20130-00A 18 G3 Installation Guide Table 4 Test Checklist STEP ACTION TEST CHECKLIST EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

G3 units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. 1 Power-up LED Sequence 2 Connect and save config Press WinRIS Get button 3 Main transceiver Output as per Table 1 - G3 LEDs indications as per WinRIS Help content Power Press TX (Unmod) UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts 900MHz: 25 watts all +10%, -10%;

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per customer request Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line watt-

meter Refer to factory technical support. 4 Main transceiver Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) 5 Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) 6 TX Deviation (in kHz) Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modulated with a 1 kHz tone.

< 5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng. 10W in-line watt-

meter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. 300 Hz Service monitor set to read fre-

quency error Refer to factory technical support. Refer to Table 5 for TX Deviation details Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Refer to factory technical support. 7 RF Data Link test Use the base station address function and Send button to Look for Delivery confirmed on the WinRIS Status bar. Refer to section 4.3.3 and to Win-

RIS Help content. Check on the WinRIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range (i.e. better than -107dBm) or dynamically test the link Refer to factory technical support. Set the service monitor to generate at the unit antenna jack the RF levels mentioned below. The carrier generated 8 should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation as per step 4 above. 9 Main Rec. RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm 10 Aux Receiver repeat as per step 9

- 70 dBm +/-3 typical

-110 dBm +/-3 typical

-120 dBm +/- 3 typical WinRIS bar graph same as step 9 above WinRIS bar graph The RSSI checks give a general indication of receivers' health Refer to factory technical support only if RX data per-

formance degradation is no-

ticed combined to out-of- tol-

erance RSSI readings. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model), 35 watts (800MHz model) and 25 watts (900MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency cali-

bration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 122 20130-00A 19 G3 Installation Guide Additional test details 4.3 4.3.1 TX Deviation G3 is per unit factory-calibrated. Deviation values listed below serve as reference only. Table 5 - TX Deviation TX Deviation Full Channel Units Special Channel Units Half Channel Units SRC8FSK 48.0kb/s 43.2kb/s SRC16FSK 64.0 kb/s 57.6 kb/s UHF 4.5 4.5 UHF 4.5 4.5 800 3.7 3.7 800 3.2 3.2 SRC8FSK 800 US

(NPSPAC) 900 US SRC8FSK SRC16FSK 28.8kb/s 24.0kb/s 2.8 2.8 900 US TBD TBD Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. 2.9 2.9 800 US TBD TBD TBD TBD 24.0kb/s 21.6kb/s SRC16FSK TBD TBD UHF 2.2 2.2 UHF TBD TBD 800 2.2 2.2 800 TBD TBD 4.3.2 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the G3 front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second.1 This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground position solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the fol-

lowing trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital voltmeter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS ca-

ble, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short circuit the GPS antenna is either a passive antenna which is the WRONG type, or a defective active an-

tenna, replace with a known good active antenna. 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait about three minutes for the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on G3, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective. 1 Lit green and flashing amber for the 800MHz & 900MHz models under transmitter duty cycle limit. 122 20130-00A 20 G3 Installation Guide 4.3.3 RF Data Link Test A link test between a mobile and a known base station can be done using the WinRIS "Address"

and "Send" functions. The Address and Device fields, the Send button and the Chat mes-

sage screen are used to send messages to specific mobile or base or to carry out RF test. Start by entering the address of the mobile (or base station) you wish to send a test message to or test:

1- Specify the address:

Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Address field in two ways:

- Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126.

- As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) address, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN.

- The base address is usually: 1.

- The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

- For Paragon products:

address is not in AMN or number format

- For mobile products:

address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid for-

mat, and correctly typed. 2- Enter the Device number for mobile (or base station). 3- Press the Send button. The Chat window reports Sent to xx mobile (where xx is mobile name). If test is successful:

Status line reports Delivery confirmed. If test unsuccessful:

Chat window reports Waiting, Then the Status line reports Delivery Failed. 122 20130-00A 21 G3 Installation Guide 5. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Mode of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector Interface connector RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Adjacent channel rejection

(Selectivity) Intermodulation rejection FM hum & noise ratio Spurious Response Rejection Conducted spurious TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise ratio Attack time UHF 800 MHz 403 - 460MHz2, 450 - 512 MHz TX 806 - 824 MHz, RX 851 - 869 MHz 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm 900 MHz1 TX 896 - 902 MHz, RX 935 - 941 MHz

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Half Duplex 16 internally stored, flash-EEPROM programmable 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external, Internal crowbar diode for reverse polarity protection

< 650 mA Standby (with GPS receiver)

< 12 A any, 5 MHz typical

< 12 A 45 MHz typical 7.1 D x 6.0 W x 2.0 H

< 4.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal

< 10 A 39 MHz typical Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female GPS RX: SMA female (Not installed for G3 Lite version) 3x DE-9F D-subminiature

-116 dBm (< 0.35 V) *

75 dB @ 25 kHz, 65 dB @ 12.5 kHz 63 dB @ 12.5 kHz

>40 dB @ 12.5 kHz, >45 dB @ 25 kHz *

>40 dB @ 12.5 kHz *

75 dB

>80 dB

-57 dBm

* psophometrically weighted filter UHF = 10-40 watts 800 MHz = 10-35 watts 900 MHz = 10-25 watts 20% @ full power, 30 sec. max. TX time (subject to FCC MPE limit)

> -80 dBc 1.5 ppm

>40dB @ 1.5 kHz deviation, >45 dB @ 3.0 kHz deviation

< 10 ms 1 WARNING:

2 WARNING:

901 - 902 MHz is reserved for use outside US and Canada The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 122 20130-00A 22 G3 Installation Guide Data rates and Modulation type Rx Sensitivity for 1%

Packet Error Rate with Parallel Decode, at carrier frequency Protocol DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs Environmental MIL. spec. Environment Low Pressure High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Shock Solar Radiation Rain Humidity Dust Vibration Shock SRRC8FSK (21600 b/s, 24000 b/s, 43200 b/s);

SRRC16FSK (21600 b/s, 24000 b/s, 57600 b/s, 64000 b/s );

UHF

(Full channel) TBD@64kbps TBD@57.6kbps UHF

(Half channel) 800 MHz

(full channel) 800 MHz & 900 MHz

(NPSPAC channel) TBD@64kbps TBD@57.6kbps 110 dBm @ 21.6 kb/s 106 dBm @ 43.2 kb/s Dataradio Proprietary E-DBA with OOB AAVL support 106 dBm @ 43.2 kb/s 110 dBm @ 24 kb/s RX/TX, PWR Categories Operations Operations, Storage Operations, Storage Transfer of equipment Heat effects Drip rain Induced, Aggravated Blowing dust Ground Mobile Functional, Bench handling MIL Spec. 810E Method 500.3 501.3 502.3 503.3 505.3 506.3 507.3 510.3 514.4 516.4 Procedure II I(A1), II I(C3), II (C1) I(AI,C2) I II II,III I I(8) I,VI Other IEC IP54 only II IEC IP54 EIA RS-204C Forestry EIA RS-204C EMISSION DESIGNATORS Bit rate Modulation FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS Band FCC IC (DOC) UHF 800 900 EOTGPDA 773195525A EOTGPDB 773195643A EOTGPD9 773A-GPD9 19200 9600 9600 8000 64000 57600 43200 32000 25600 24000 21600 19200 16000 14400 Baud rate 19200 9600 9600 8000 16000 14400 14400 16000 12800 8000 7200 9600 8000 7200 DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK SRRC16FSK SRRC16FSK SRRC8FSK RC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC8FSK SRRC8FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK UHF

(FCC Mask) 15K0F1D (C)

*15K0F1D (C) 8K60F1D (D)

*8K60F1D (D) 16K4F1D(C) 16K9F1D(C) 16K4F1D (C) 16K5F1D (C) 15K6F1D (C)

800MHz

(FCC Mask) 15K0F1D (G)

*15K0F1D (G) 8K60F1D (H)

*8K60F1D (H) 14K4F1D(G) 14K1F1D(G) 14K7F1D (G) 15K6F1D (G) 15K6F1D (G) 11K0F1D (H) 9K67F1D (D)

900MHz

(FCC Mask)

10K2F1D (J) 8K75F1D (J)

11K4F1D (J)

8K17F1D (D) 8K67F1D (D) 10K2F1D (H) 10K0F1D (H) 9K92F1D (J) 10K7F1D (J)

* Under class 1 permissive change 122 20130-00A 23 G3 Installation Guide

 

 

Gemini / PD Service Manual Mobile Radio Modem version 0.03 PRELIMINARY The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Service Software described in this manual are copyright 1998 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. November 1998 part no.: 120 1020110-003 Table of Contents 1. 2.1.1 1.6.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 CONFIGURATION............................................................................................................................................... 1 1.4 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT........................................................................................................................ 2 1.5 PRODUCT WARRANTY ...................................................................................................................................... 2 1.6 REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................................................................................................... 2 Factory Repair ........................................................................................................................................ 2 2. OPERATION...................................................................................................................................................... 2 2.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS ................................................................................................................................... 2 LED Indicators........................................................................................................................................ 3 2.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE ..................................................................................................................................... 3 2.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels ............................................................................................................... 3 ADJUSTMENTS AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................... 4 3.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................................ 4 3.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 4 3.2 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ..................................................................................................................................... 4 3.3 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS............................................................................................................................... 4 3.4 TESTS & ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................................................................... 4 3.4.1 Preliminary Verification ......................................................................................................................... 4 3.4.2 Basic Tests & adjustments....................................................................................................................... 4 3.4.3 Tests & adjustments Procedure............................................................................................................... 4 3.4.4 Opening the Unit..................................................................................................................................... 6 3.4.5 GPS Diagnostics Procedure.................................................................................................................... 7 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................................................................ 8 4. 3. i What's New in Version 0.02 GPS Diagnostics procedure History Version 0.1: First preliminary version Version 0.2:

Unit specification revised Typo correction ii Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE GCU Gemini/PD HDX RS-232 RSS Simplex Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232C interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. See also DTE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232C interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. See also DCE. Gemini Control Unit board High specs mobile radio modem. PD = Parallel decode Half Duplex. A unit which uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for low speed data transfer (EIA-RS-232E). Radio Service Software. This software allows configuration and testing of the Gemini/PD. A unit which uses the same frequency for transmit and receive. iii Features:

Rugged water-proof die-cast aluminum chassis. Data speeds of 9600 to 19200 b/s

(9600 b/s maximum in half channels) 3 available user ports using standard RS-232 interface Builtin 16-channel synthesized radio transceiver. controlled). Power output of 10W to 40W (software Half duplex or simplex operation. 1.3 Configuration Operating characteristics of the Gemini/PD are configured by Dataradio System Engineering for communication protocols and network settings. A Radio Service Software (RSS) is provided for radio/modem maintenance, adjustments and frequency programming. The RSS is MSDOS based and will run on any 486 or higher PC (2 Megabytes memory required). WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and cannot not be programmed into the unit. 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the operation and maintenance of the DATARADIO Gemini/PD mobile radio-

modem. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engi-

neering design, installation, and mainte-

nance personnel. 1.2 General Description Gemini/PD is a mobile radio-modem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usu-

ally from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief responses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using a GPS receiver, determines posi-

tion, speed and direction of fleet mem-

bers. The Gemini/PD is made-up of a main transceiver and a auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode (PD), a 40 Watt power amplifier, a Gemini Control Unit (GCU) with DSP driven modem and an integrated OEM GPS receiver. 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 1 Gemini/PD Technical Manual 1.4 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: +1 514 737-0020 fax:

+1 514 737-7883 or DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone: 1 770 392-0002 fax:

1 770 392-9199 or Email address: support@dataradio.com 1.5 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.6 Replacement Parts This product is normally not field service-

able, except by the replacement of complete units. Specialized equipment and training is required to repair the GCU board and radio modules. Contact Technical Support for service in-

formation before returning equipment. A Technical Support representative may sug-

gest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.6.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact per-

son who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Informa-

tion about these charges is available from Technical Support. 2. Operation 2.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver Two LED indicators Three DE-9F RS232 ports The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed power connector with ignition sense 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 2 Gemini/PD Technical Manual We recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire cable with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, mainte-

nance & adjustment as well to connect user applications. 2.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the fol-

lowing conventions are used:

Table 1 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term ON OFF Alternates asserted, spacing Signal level

+3 to +15 V dropped, marking

-3 to -15 V 2.1.1 LED Indicators The Gemini/PD has two LED indicators:

LEDs name PWR RX/TX Indicates Description red red green flashing red/green DC Power is applied Unit transmit Unit receive Radio is unlocked 2.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports:

Function DE-9 F pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD from Gemini/PD, normally asserted RXD data from Gemini/PD TXD data to Gemini/PD DTR to Gemini/PD, handshaking Ground DSR from Gemini/PD, tied to VCC through current limiting resis-

tor RTS - to Gemini/PD, handshaking CTS from Gemini/PD, hand-

shaking AUX auxiliary input to Gemini/PD, panic line input (port 3):

It may be activated by dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 3 Gemini/PD Technical Manual 3. Adjustments and Maintenance 1.1 Overview This chapter outlines the basic adjustment pro-

cedures required upon initial installation and thereafter at prescribed maintenance intervals. Units are delivered from the factory properly aligned and tested on the frequencies specified at time of order. Adjustment beyond that de-

scribed in this chapter is not required unless ra-

dio modules have been tampered with or re-

paired. In such cases we recommend complete factory re-alignment as special test jigs are re-

quired. Intended Audience 3.1 This chapter is intended for use by installation and maintenance personnel. 3.2 Equipment Required The adjustments described below require the following equipment:

13.6 VDC (nominal), 20A regulated power supply. Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect Gemini/PD to the service monitor. Gemini Radio Service Software, A 486 PC (or better) to run the RSS. Normal radio shop tools. 3.3 Maintenance Intervals The adjustments described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever a deterio-

ration in performance indicates that adjustment may be required. 3.4 Tests & Adjustments 3.4.1 Preliminary Verification Before performing any adjustment, verify the per-

formance of the unit as shown in the Table 1. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been calibrated recently and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation problems have actually been erroneous indications from serv-

ice monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months. 3.4.2 Basic Tests & adjustments Recommended Tests:

1. TX power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation Note: Only if a loss in system performance has been detected, RX SINAD and RX audio distortion should be verified. Adjustments:

1. Transmitter power output 2. Frequency error 3. Transmitter deviation 3.4.3 Tests & adjustments Proce-

dure Refer to the RSS help file for details &

parameter information. 1. Connect the Gemini/PD main antenna con-

nector (or the auxiliary receiver) to the TX/RX input of the service monitor using a suitable length of 50 ohm cable. 2. Connect the Gemini/PD to a suitable power supply and adjust the supply voltage to 13.6 volts. 3. Using a suitable 9 conductor straight RS-

232 cable, connect the Gemini port 1 to the RS-232 port of a PC and run the Gemini RSS program. 4. Press GET to get the configuration of the unit. 5. Refer to Tests and Adjustments table. 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 4 Gemini/PD Technical Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 Table 1: Tests and Adjustments Full & Half ChannelUnits STEP ACTION Output Power Press PTT Channel x EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C 40 watts 1

+10%, -20%

MEASURE WITH Service monitor set to read power Frequency Error Press PTT Channel x 300 Hz Service monitor set to read fre-

quency error Deviation Press PTT Channel x Carrier will be modulated with a 1 KHz tone. Service monitor set to read deviation For any bit rate speeds selected:

Full channel unit 4.0 kHz

+5%, -10%

Half channel unit 2.5 kHz

+5%, -10%

IF NOT?

Check the RSS maximum power output setting: must be set to 255

(means 40W). User can however reduced it down to 10 Watts. Refer to factory tech support. Adjust using the RSS Freq Warp setting (fine tuning adjust)

(Typical adjust range is 1.5KHz) If found outside limits, user is to call factory technical sup-

port. Using RSS, adjust TX deviation. Set the service monitor to generate a 80 dBm signal on the selected receive frequency. The signal should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone. Open the top cover to access the radio (see 3.4.4) To be performed only if a loss in system performance has been detected 12 dB SINAD For Full channel unit, set deviation to 3 kHz. For Half channel unit, set deviation to 1.5 KHz Set service monitor IF filter to mid (15-30 kHz), no audio filter. Measure taken at J400 pin 21 (RX1) and at pin 23

(RX2) 0.5 V 2 Service monitor set for SINAD. Connect to radio connector J400 pin 21 (RX1) or pin 23 (RX2). Refer to factory technical support. Distortion Use same settings as per 12 dB SINAD

< 3%

Same as per Step 5 Refer to factory technical support. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency calibration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 2 If a psophometrically weighted filter is available on the service monitor, use 0.35 V. 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 5 Gemini/PD Technical Manual 3.4.4 Opening the Unit 1. Remove the two Philips screw from the unit top cover. 2. Remove the top cover by lifting it from the rear. 3. Slide the cover out of the case. Figure 1 Gemini/PD Top view (cover removed) 13.6Vdc Power connector Main Antenna connector 23 24 J400 1 2 Aux. Receiver Antenna connector GPS Receiver antenna connector RS232 com ports 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 6 Gemini/PD Technical Manual 3.4.5 GPS Diagnostics Procedure OVERVIEW The detection of the POSition message shows a GPS CONNECTED LED. After about three minutes, detection of the one Pulse Per Second (PPS) should flash the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator, this means that the GPS has a position solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.) the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a DVM. If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS ca-

ble, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short circuit the GPS antenna is either a passive antenna which is the WRONG type, or a defective active an-

tenna, replace with a known good active antenna. 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait about three minutes for the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on Gemini, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective. 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 7 Gemini/PD Technical Manual 4. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Tx Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Modes of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector Interface connector RECEIVER Frequency Rx Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Selectivity (25KHz) Selectivity (12.5) Intermodulation Spurious rejection FM hum & noise Conducted spurious

* psophometrically weighted filter UHF 800 MHz 400 - 512 MHz1 806-824, (821-824) 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Simplex or Half Duplex 16 internally stored 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external 2 & 4 Amp fuse internal

< 550 mA Standby (with auxiliary receiver)

< 15 A 5 MHz typical 7.050 D x 6.000 W x 2.0000 H

< 3.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female GPS RX: SMA female 3x DE-9F D-subminiature UHF 800 400-5121 MHz 851-869MHz (866-869)

< 0.35 V *

75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 65 dB typical 60 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum 75 dB typical 70 dB minimum

-45 dB typical *

< -57 dBm 1 WARNING: The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 8 Gemini/PD Technical Manual TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise Attack time MODEM OPERATION Interface Operation Data rates Modulation type Packet Error Rate

(for < 1% error) Protocol UHF 10-40 watts 20% @ full power, 30 seconds maximum transmit time

-75 dBc (-38 dBm @10 W) typical 1.5 ppm

-45 dB max (25 kHz)

< 10 ms EIA RS-232C Simplex/half duplex 4800 b/s DRCMSK 9600 b/s DRCMSK 19200 b/s DRCMSK better than 110 dBm at 9600 b/s half channel better than 115 dBm at 9600 b/s full channel better than 112 dBm at 16000 b/s full channel better than 109 dBm at 19200 b/s full channel Dataradio Proprietary DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs RX/TX, PWR FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS UHF 800 MHz 900 MHz FCC EOTGPDA IC (DOC) 773195525A 120 20110-003 PRELIMINARY 9 Gemini/PD Technical Manual 120 10503-201 ii T-96S Technical Manual

 

 

2.5 Antenna To meet the FCCs RF Exposure Guidelines, the main transmitter antenna should:

- be installed to ensure a 7.9 in/20cm minimum distance between the body of the user or nearby persons and the antenna.

-have the antenna gain less cable loss which does not exceed 2.7dBi. 2.5.1 Recommended tools and supplies circle cutter hole saw or socket punch for antenna Mini-UHF Crimp tool 2.5.2 Planning GeminiPD commonly uses three separate antennas:

Main transceiver constraints are MPE limits and omni-directional factors Auxiliary receiver constraints are diversity spacing and omni-directional requirements GPS constraints are TX spacing and clear sky view. For ground-plane dependent antennas the center of metal surface is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas installation may be close to the edges of the surface. Follow spacing for TX antenna. Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

- Most preferred for all antennas: centerline of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY acceptable position.

- Less preferred for receiver antenna: trunk lid, providing distance to transmitting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed.

- Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fenders, just in back of rear window

- Least preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right front fenders, ahead of windshield Note:

Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual interference especially at higher frequencies. The auxiliary receiver antenna must be installed at least 5/8 distant from the transceiver antenna. The GPS antenna placement requires a fairly unobstructed view of the sky. It must also be at least two feet distant from the transceiver antenna but it may be close to the auxiliary RX antenna. For the optimum antenna spacing at the frequency you are using, consult system engineering. 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial cables (e.g. RG-223) from each of the selected antenna positions to the position where the GeminiPD unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the connection. 3. At the GeminiPD position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connector. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the left rear of GeminiPD. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of GeminiPD to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS position below the auxiliary connector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the installation, tie-wrap together the auxiliary and the GPS antenna cables at a point about two inches in 120 20111-100 preliminary 7 Gemini/PD Installation Guide front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to correctly identify which mini-

UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing GeminiPD:

Connect DC Power cables connector to GeminiPDs until you hear a click as the two parts snap together. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal operation and to run the Radio Installation Software (RIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. 2.7. Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1- Check for proper operation of the GeminiPDs LEDs as per Table 1 in section 3.1 2- Using the RIS program (described in section 4) and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to confirm main antenna installation. 3- Using the RIS, check the RF link with a base station that can be heard by using the RIS Ping feature. See paragraph 4.4.4.4 or If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal sequence of transmitting and receiving messages. 120 20111-100 preliminary 8 Gemini/PD Installation Guide

 

 

G3 Narrow band Mobile Radiomodem Installation Guide Version 0.03

(Preliminary) The entire contents of this manual and the Radio Installation Software described in this manual are copyright 2004 by DATARADIO Inc. Copyright DATARADIO Inc. Sept, 2004 Part no.: 122 20130-003 Table of Contents 1. 2. 1.5.1 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 PRODUCT OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 6 1.1 INTENDED AUDIENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 6 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 6 1.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................. 7 1.2.2 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................... 7 1.3 FACTORY TECHNICAL SUPPORT........................................................................................................................ 8 1.4 PRODUCT WARRANTY ...................................................................................................................................... 8 1.5 REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................................................................................................... 8 Factory Repair ........................................................................................................................................ 8 1.6 UNPACKING ...................................................................................................................................................... 9 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 9 2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 9 2.1.2 Location .................................................................................................................................................. 9 2.1.3 Cable Path............................................................................................................................................... 9 2.2 WARNINGS...................................................................................................................................................... 10 RF Radiation warning........................................................................................................................... 10 Interference with vehicular electronics................................................................................................. 10 Secure mounting.................................................................................................................................... 10 Explosive environments......................................................................................................................... 10 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. ............................................................................... 10 2.3 PHYSICAL UNIT............................................................................................................................................... 11 Recommended tools and supplies.......................................................................................................... 11 Physical mounting of G3....................................................................................................................... 11 2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................ 12 Electrical requirements......................................................................................................................... 12 Routing of power cable ......................................................................................................................... 12 2.5 ANTENNA ....................................................................................................................................................... 13 Recommended tools and supplies.......................................................................................................... 13 Planning................................................................................................................................................ 14 Antenna Installation.............................................................................................................................. 15 COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL INSTALLATION. ............................................................................................. 15 CHECKING OUT NORMAL OPERATION ......................................................................................................... 15 3. OPERATING DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................... 16 3.1 FRONT & REAR PANELS ................................................................................................................................. 16 3.2 DTE PORT INTERFACE ................................................................................................................................... 17 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels ............................................................................................................. 17 TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND TESTING ..................................................................................................... 18 4.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ................................................................................................................................... 18 4.2 BASIC TESTS................................................................................................................................................... 18 4.3 ADDITIONAL TEST DETAILS ............................................................................................................................. 20 4.3.1 TX Deviation ......................................................................................................................................... 20 4.3.2 GPS Test................................................................................................................................................ 20 4.3.3 RF Data Link Test ................................................................................................................................. 21 SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................................................... 22 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.6. 2.7. 4. 5. 122 20130-003 2 G3 Installation Guide FIGURE 1 - MOUNTING PLATE AND SLOT DIMENSIONS.................................................................................................. 11 FIGURE 2 - BRACKET INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................ 12 FIGURE 3 - DC POWER CONNECTOR............................................................................................................................ 12 FIGURE 4 - ANTENNA SPACING..................................................................................................................................... 14 FIGURE 5 - FRONT AND REAR PANELS .......................................................................................................................... 16 TABLE 1 - G3 LEDS INDICATIONS................................................................................................................................ 17 TABLE 2 - DTE PORT PIN FUNCTIONS .......................................................................................................................... 17 TABLE 3 - RS-232 SIGNAL LEVELS.............................................................................................................................. 17 TABLE 4 TEST CHECKLIST ........................................................................................................................................ 19 TABLE 5 - TX DEVIATION............................................................................................................................................ 20 122 20130-003 3 G3 Installation Guide What's New in this version History Version 0.03 Prelim, September 2004 Introduction of NPSPAC (12.5kHz channels) band G3 product. Re-

leased as part of FCC and Industry Canada reports. Version 0.02 Prelim, August 2004 Introduction of narrow (12.5kHz channels) band G3 product. Re-

leased as part of Industry Canada reports. Version 0.01 Prelim, April 2004 Introduction of narrow band (25kHz channels) G3 product. Released as part of FCC reports. 122 20130-003 4 G3 Installation Guide Definitions The following terms are used throughout this document. Item DCE DTE G3 HDX RS-232 WinRIS Definition Data Communications Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or output) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Modems are always wired as DCE. Data Terminal Equipment. This designation defines the direction (input or out-

put) of the various RS-232 interface signals. Most user equipment, as well as PCs, are wired as DTE. Third generation of Gemini/PD products. Runs up to 64 kb/s in 25kHz channel. Half Duplex. A unit that uses separate transmit and receive frequencies, but which may not transmit and receive simultaneously. Industrystandard interface for data transfer. Windows Radio Installation Software. This software allows basic tests and unit configuration. 122 20130-003 5 G3 Installation Guide 1. PRODUCT OVERVIEW This document provides the information required for the installation, operation, and verification of the DATARADIO G3. Intended Audience 1.1 This document is designed for use by engineering design, installation, and maintenance personnel. General Description 1.2 G3 is a mobile radiomodem aimed at the public safety and public utility markets to meet demand for high speed and high throughput. It integrates all the necessary hardware for data-only vehicular installations up to but not including the laptop PC and its application software. Example of applications are:

1. Database inquiry systems. Small number of brief messages, (usually from the mobile station) with fairly long responses. 2. Computer-aided dispatch (CAD). Large number of messages, (usually from the base station) with very brief responses. 3. Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL). Using built-in GPS receiver, determines position, speed and direction of fleet members. G3 is made-up of:

A main transceiver An auxiliary receiver for Parallel Decode (PD) A power amplifier (40-Watt for UHF, 35-Watt for 800 MHz, 25-Watt for 900MHz models) A Gemini Processor/Modem board with DSP modem An integrated OEM 12-channel GPS receiver. 122 20130-003 6 G3 Installation Guide 1.2.1 Features One-piece integrated design in a rugged die-cast aluminum chassis. Parallel Decode (PD) technology featuring dual receivers for added decode sensitivity in multi-path and fading environments. Sophisticated DSP-based modem design provides added system performance, fewer retries and more effective throughput. Automatic channel changing for improved roaming capabilities. Builtin, up to 16-channel flash-programmable synthesized radio transceiver with automatic channel selection. Models with on-air data speeds and modulation types as follows:

Modulation type SRC16FSK SRC8FSK 12.5 kHz 32.0 kb/s 28.8 kb/s 21.6 kb/s 24.0 kb/s Channel spacing NPSPAC & 900 MHz 32.0 kb/s 28.8 kb/s 24.0 kb/s 28.8 kb/s 25 kHz 64 kb/s 57.6 kb/s 43.2 kb/s 48 kb/s One RJ-45 10BaseT Ethernet port Two available user ports using standard RS-232 interface via built-in multiplexer. One USB port Half-duplex operation. Out-of-band signaling enables transmission of GPS reports with no effect on system performance. Next generation high efficiency airlink E-DBA protocol 1.2.2 Configuration G3 is factory configured based on each customer network system requirements, usually by Dataradio System Engineering. Configuration is not changeable in the field without notifying Dataradio. 122 20130-003 7 G3 Installation Guide 1.3 Factory Technical Support The Technical Support departments of DATARADIO provide customer assistance on technical problems and serve as an interface with factory repair facilities. They can be reached in the following ways:

DATARADIO Inc. 5500 Royalmount Ave, suite 200 Town of Mount Royal Quebec, Canada H4P 1H7 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Eastern Time phone:

fax:

Email address: support@dataradio.com

+1 514 737-0020

+1 514 737-7883 DATARADIO Corp. 6160 Peachtree Dunwoody RD., suite C-200 Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Technical support hours: Monday to Friday 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Eastern Time phone:

fax:

Email address: drctech@dataradio.com 1 770 392-0002 1 770 392-9199 1.4 Product Warranty Warranty information may be obtained by contacting your sales representative. 1.5 Replacement Parts This product is not field-serviceable, except by the replacement of a complete unit. Specialized equip-

ment and training is required to repair the processor and radio boards. Contact Technical Support for service information before returning equipment. A Technical Support rep-

resentative may suggest a solution eliminating the need to return equipment. 1.5.1 Factory Repair When returning equipment for repair, you must request an RMA (Returned Material Authorization) number. The Tech Support representative will ask you several questions to clearly identify the problem. Please give the representative the name of a contact person, who is familiar with the problem, should questions arise during servicing of the unit. Customers are responsible for shipping charges for returned units. Units in warranty will be repaired free of charge unless there is evidence of abuse or damage beyond the terms of the warranty. Units out of warranty will be subject to service charges. Information about these charges is available from Technical Support. 122 20130-003 8 G3 Installation Guide 1.6 Unpacking When ready for installation, carefully unpack your G3 kit (p/n 023 6000-101) shipping carton and iden-

tify each item as listed below:

Installation mounting bracket One G3 Power cable 22 feet (6.7 meters) Small parts kit If damage has occurred to the equipment during shipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. 2. Installation 2.1 Planning the Installation 2.1.1 Overview To ensure trouble-free, efficient installation, start by inspecting the vehicle to determine the optimum position for G3 and its antennas as well as the routing of all associated cabling and wiring. 2.1.2 Location Often, installations in cars are done in the trunk, underneath the back window ledge or on the trunk floor. In vans and small trucks, it is usually done in the back of the vehicle. In large vehicles, it is often done in the front cabin. Be sure to place the G3 unit in such a way that:

The LEDs can be seen (as an aid in troubleshooting) Access to the antenna connectors is possible without removing the unit Sufficient air may flow around the unit to provide adequate cooling G3 is not fully waterproof, therefore it should be mounted sufficiently away from an opened trunk lid or opened tailgate, windows or doors to avoid exposure to rain and/or snow. It also minimizes the chance that material can be accidentally thrown on the unit or of someone bumping against it. 2.1.3 Cable Path Try to route the cables away from locations where they would be exposed to heat (exhaust pipes, muf-

flers, tailpipes, etc.), battery acid, sharp edges, mechanical damage or where they would be a nuisance to automobile mechanics, the driver or the passengers. Keep wiring away from automotive computer modules, other electronic modules and ignition circuits to help prevent interference between these components and radio equipment. Try using existing holes in firewall and trunk wall and the channels above and below or beneath the doors, channels through doors and window columns that are convenient to run cables and wires. Whenever possible, install conduit in which to run the cables. 122 20130-003 9 G3 Installation Guide 2.2 Warnings Before starting installation, review all of the following warnings. 2.2.1 RF Radiation warning Recommended safety guidelines for the human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy are contained in the Canadian Safety Code 6 and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Bulletin 65. Proper installation of the transceiver antenna of G3 as summarized in section 2.5 will result in user exposure substantially below the recommended limits for the general public. Qualified personnel must do all antenna installations. See paragraph 2.5.2 for recommended antenna positioning. Transmissions when persons or animals outside the vehicle are within two feet of the antenna may result in radio energy radiation burns or related injuries. 2.2.2 Interference with vehicular electronics Certain vehicle electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to lack of protection from radio fre-

quency energy present when transmitting. It includes, and is not limited to:

Electronic fuel injection systems Electronic anti-skid braking systems Electronic cruise control systems If the installation vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits will perform normally when the radio is transmitting. 2.2.3 Secure mounting For vehicle occupant(s) safety, mount G3 securely so that the unit will not break loose in case of an acci-

dent or violent maneuvers. 2.2.4 Explosive environments Operation of vehicular radio transmitters in explosive environments may be hazardous and conventional safety precautions must prevail. These include and are not limited to:

Transmitting while fuelling the vehicle. Do not carry fuel containers in the same compartment as G3. Dynamite blasting caps may explode when transmitting radio operation takes place within 500 feet. Always obey the Turn Off Two-Way Radios signs posted at sites where dynamite is being used. If transporting blasting caps:

from the vehicle. a) Carry the blasting caps in an appropriate metal container having a soft cushioning lining. b) Suppress transmissions whenever the blasting caps container is being loaded or unloaded into or Check applicable local bylaws. 2.2.5 Installation in vehicles powered by liquefied gas. G3 installations in vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP-gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection As-

sociation Standard NFPA 58 which requires:

Space containing radio equipment shall be isolated by a seal from the space containing the LP-

gas container and its fittings. 122 20130-003 10 G3 Installation Guide Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP-gas container. The LP-gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 2.3 Physical Unit 2.3.1 Recommended tools and supplies Electric drill for mounting holes Hammer and center punch Tie-wraps Drills and circle cutters as needed according the size of screws (or nuts and bolts) used. In-line Power meter capable of measuring forward and reflected power at the operating fre-

quency of the radio. 2.3.2 Physical mounting of G3 a) Start by running all the cables (DC power, PC RS-232 as well as all antennas cabling) prior to mounting G3 to assure the feasibility of the planned cable routing. b) Be sure to leave sufficient slack in each cable so the G3 may be removed from the mounting bracket for servicing with the power applied and the antenna attached. c) G3 is ready for installation. Cautions:

When drilling mounting holes, be careful to avoid damaging some vital part of the vehi-

cle such as fuel tanks, transmission housing etc. Always check how far the mounting screws extend below the mounting surface prior to installation. Use of drill bit stops is highly recommended. After drilling, remove all metal shavings before installing screws. Do not overtighten self-tapping screws. 1. Once you have found a suitable mounting position for G3, hold the unit and the unattached mounting bracket in the proposed mounting position and check that there is clearance behind the unit for the heatsink, cables, etc. Check that the position provides a large enough flat surface that the bracket will not be distorted when installed. 2.5"

0.2"

1.0"

6.0"

Figure 1 - Mounting plate and slot dimensions 2. Using the installation bracket as a template, mark the four locations for drilling (see Figure 1). Again, ensure that drilling at the selected points is safe and will not cause damage. 3. Indent the drilling positions with a center punch. 4. Drill holes sized for the self-tapping screws or for the nuts, bolts and lock washers used. Caution: Slightly reduce the size of the drilled holes when using self-tapping screws in thin metal. 122 20130-003 11 G3 Installation Guide Figure 2 - Bracket installation 5. Install the bracket without distorting (see Figure 2). 6. Securely mount G3 to the installed bracket using the four supplied 8x40 black machine screws. 7. Drill any additional holes as required for routing all cables and fit holes with suitable grommets or bushings whenever required. 2.4 Electrical installation 2.4.1 Electrical requirements G3 is designed to operate from a 13.8Vdc nominal car battery (negative ground) and requires currents up to 12.0A. It will tolerate a supply voltage range of 10.9 volts to 16.3 volts. In vehicles with a 24 VDC electrical system (mostly in trucks), it is essential to provide a suitably rated 24/12 VDC converter to isolate the unit from the battery and protect it against excessive voltage. Warnings:

Always disconnect G3s DC power lead before connecting a second battery, using power from another vehicle or power boosting (e.g. when jump starting the vehicle). 2.4.2 Routing of power cable 1. Start by disconnecting the vehicles battery unless specifically prohibited from doing so by the customer, vehicle manufacturer, agent or supplier. Note:

In this event, exercise extreme caution throughout the installation and fit the fuse only when the installation is complete. 2. The 22 feet (6.7 meters) long power cable consists of three wires attached to a Packard Electric Weather-Pack connector (DC power Connector, see Figure 3). Figure 3 - DC Power Connector SEAL

(DO NOT REMOVE) 13.8VDC B+

(Fused Red wire) GROUND

(Blue wire) C B A IGNITION

(Small red wire) The DC Power connector has:

At position A, the smaller red switch-sense wire (commonly to ignition) At position B, the blue ground wire At position C, a larger red B+ DC power wire (MUST be unswitched) 122 20130-003 12 G3 Installation Guide 3. Place this connector at G3s radio power input location. Do not connect at this time. See paragraph 2.6, Completing the physical installation. 4. Carefully route both the B and the C wires to where the in-line fuse holder will be installed, usually as close to the vehicles battery as practicable. Ensure that leads do not chafe on any metal part(s). Secure the wires at several locations along their length. Caution:

Use proper crimping tool. Common pliers are NOT acceptable. Warning:

The DC Power lead must be unswitched 5. Insert the negative (blue) lead into one of the appropriate connector lug and crimp solidly to force the metal contacts onto the wires. 6. Repeat the step above for connecting the red DC power lead. 7. Attach the positive lead at the battery positive terminal. Attach the negative wire at the vehicle end of the battery ground cable. If the negative cable is connected directly to the battery negative terminal, it should be fused in case of failure of the vehicles ground cable. Ensure tight and secure connections. 8. Fasten the fuse holder and leads. 9. Carefully route the A wire to where the connection will be made for switch sensing. Connect to Ignition if you wish to have G3 turning ON and OFF dependent on the vehicles ig-

nition key. Connect to Accessory if you wish G3 to be available when the engine is not running, but still dependent on the ignition key. Connect to a user-supplied control switch. In installations equipped with a ChargeGuard, connect to the controlled-side of the Char-

geGuard (remembering that the DC Power lead must NOT be switched). 10. Make appropriate connections. Cautions:

Where scraping to bare metal was required, and at the battery posts where wire ends and lugs may be exposed, apply anti-corrosion compound. Insert the fuse only when installation is complete and ready to test. 11. At the G3 position, neatly coil cable slack and attach securely. 2.5 Antenna The main transmitter antenna must be vehicle-mounted to provide a separation distance of 50 cm or more from all persons and the antenna gain must not exceed 5dBi (with a 1.6dB cable loss). 2.5.1 Recommended tools and supplies Mini-UHF Crimp tool circle cutter, hole saw or socket punch for antenna 122 20130-003 13 G3 Installation Guide 2.5.2 Planning Referring to Figure 4, G3 commonly uses three separate antennas:

T - Main transceiver -

Constraints are the limit of 50 cm (see section 2.5 above) and omni-directional factors R - Auxiliary receiver Constraints are the receiver spacing of at least 5/8 (wavelength) from transceiver antenna and omni-directional requirements G - Global Positioning System (GPS) Constraints are TX spacing of at least 24-in/60.96 cm from all transmitting antennas and a clear view of the sky. 5/8

(UHF: 18"/46cm 800MHz: 9"/23cm 900MHz: 8/21cm) R MPE 50cm 19.7in. T G 24in. Figure 4 - Antenna spacing For the optimum antenna spacing at the frequency you are using, consult System Engineering. For installation of ground-plane dependent antennas, the center of the metal surface used for mounting is preferable for best omni-directional pattern. For ground-plane independent antennas, installation may be close to the edges of the surface. Install the antennas in one of the following positions:

Most preferred for all antennas: centerline of roof. For transmitter antenna, it is the ONLY accept-

able position. Less preferred for receiver antenna: trunk lid, providing distance to transmitting antenna is respected whether lid is opened or closed. Much less preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right rear fenders, just in back of rear window Least preferred, but permissible for receiver antenna: left or right front fenders, ahead of windshield Proximity to other vehicle-mounted antennas may cause mutual interference especially at higher fre-

quencies. 122 20130-003 14 G3 Installation Guide 2.5.3 Antenna Installation 1. Route good quality 50-ohm coaxial cables (e.g. RG-223) from each of the selected antenna positions to the position where the G3 unit is mounted. 2. Terminate the end at each of the antenna positions with the appropriate connector for the antenna used and make the connection. 3. At the G3 position, cut the three cables to length and terminate with the appropriate plug. For the transceiver and the auxiliary cables, use a Mini-UHF crimp plug using an appropriate crimping tool. For the GPS, use a SMA connector. 4. Positively identify the transceiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the left rear of G3. 5. Positively identify the auxiliary receiver mini-UHF plug and connect to the front left of G3 to the RX position. 6. Connect the SMA connector to the GPS* position below the auxiliary connector position. 7. Do not skip this last step, trust us; it is an important one. To complete the installation, tie-wrap to-

gether the auxiliary and the GPS antenna cables at a point about two inches in front of the unit. It will be much easier hereafter to correctly identify which mini-UHF plug goes where. You DO NOT want to cross the auxiliary plug with the transceiver plug. 2.6. Completing the physical Installation. To complete the physical installation and prior to testing G3:

Connect DC Power cables connector to G3s until you hear a click as the two parts snap to-

gether. Re-check that all other connections are secure (antennas, PC, etc.) Switch vehicle ignition ON. You are now ready to check for normal operation and to run the Radio Installation Software (WinRIS) program for testing or trouble-shooting. 2.7. Checking out Normal operation Check that the vehicle ignition is ON. 1. Check for proper operation of the G3s LEDs as per Table 1 on page 17. 2. Using the WinRIS program and an in-line wattmeter, check forward & reverse power to confirm main antenna installation (as per section 4). 3. Using WinRIS, check the RF Data Link with a base station that can be heard (see section 4.3.3). If user application and its base station are available, test the installation by going through a normal se-

quence of transmitting and receiving messages. 122 20130-003 15 G3 Installation Guide 3. Operating Description 3.1 Front & Rear Panels The front panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the auxiliary receiver One SMA type female connector for the GPS receiver (not installed on G3 Lite model) Three LED indicators Two DE-9F RS232 ports One Ethernet 10/100BaseT port One USB port (future use) The rear panel includes:

One mini-UHF type female antenna connector for the main transceiver One 3-pin pigtailed DC Power connector with ignition sense RX GPS G3 PWR PGM RX TX LNK ACT

0 0 0

. 2 USB DEV-2 DEV-1 ETH 6.000"

Figure 5 - Front and rear panels 122 20130-003 16 G3 Installation Guide Power-on Sequence (LEDs are paired) PWR Red Amber Green Red flashing Red Slow Red/Green Fast Red/Green RX / TX Red Off Off Off

Red Red Indication Normal boot-up start

(10 to 27 sec.) Then 8 seconds to completing boot-up Normal state Hardware failure Missing DSP RSSI calibration Software failure

(firmware erased) Programming in progress l a m r o N s r o r r E l a i c e p S Table 1 - G3 LEDs indications G3 LEDs indications Normal Operation (LEDs are independent) PWR Indication RX / TX Indication Green*

Normal ready state Off No network activity Amber*

1 Pulse per sec (1 pps) Sufficient satellites acquired by GPS Green Receiving packets DBA sync allows transmit Amber Receiving packets DBA out-of-sync prevents transmit Red Transmitting

* For 800 & 900 MHz US models (using Transmit duty cycle limit firmware) :

- PWR lit Green = normal indication or Flashing Amber = normal + 1pps

- PWR lit Amber = exceeded duty-cycle or Flashing Green = exceeded d-c + 1pps 3.2 DTE Port Interface For all three ports, we recommend the use of a shielded 9-wire cable with all pins connected. These ports can be used for unit configuration, maintenance, & adjustment as well to connect user applications. Table 2 - DTE port pin functions DE-9 F pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function DCD from G3, normally asserted RXD data from G3 TXD data to G3 DTR to G3, handshaking Ground DSR from G3, tied to VCC through current limiting resistor RTS - to G3, handshaking CTS from G3, handshaking AUX - auxiliary input to G3, (for port 2: Officer requires assistance Alarm input) It may be activated by (normally open) dry contact pull-up to the ports DSR output. It may also tolerate user pull-up to external +12 VDC (car battery), but an isolated dry contact is preferred due to the risk of noise-related false alarms caused by the vehicles electrical system. A +3 to +12 V signal at this pin will send a DMP x (On) message to the base. An open or ground signal will send a DMP y (Off) message. Messages are only sent when a signal transition occurs. See Appendix A on page 24 for further details. 3.2.1 RS-232 Interface Signal Levels In the descriptions of data signals, the following conventions are used:

Table 3 - RS-232 Signal Levels Term ON OFF Alternates asserted, spacing dropped, marking Signal level

+3 to +15 V

-3 to -15 V 122 20130-003 17 G3 Installation Guide 4. Trouble-Shooting and Testing The checks described below should be done at annual intervals or whenever deterioration in per-

formance is noted. 4.1 Equipment Required 13.8 VDC (nominal) car battery, or 13.8 VDC/20A regulated power supply (In the case the unit is not installed in a vehicle) In-line watt meter (50W range) Radio service monitor (IFR or equivalent). Cable with mini-UHF male connector to connect G3 to the service monitor. WinRIS version 4.0 or later*

4.2 Basic Tests Recommended checks:

1. Transmit and Reverse power output 2. Carrier frequency error 3. Frequency deviation 4. Receivers RSSI Check 5. RF Data Link test between a Gemini and a base station. 6. GPS test (not required on G3 Lite model).

- For checks 1 to 5, refer to Table 4 Test Checklist below.

- For check 6, refer to paragraph 4.3.2 - GPS Test. Important note: Before proceeding make sure that the service monitor has been recently calibrated and has warmed up for at least the time specified by its manufacturer. Some reported frequency and deviation problems have actually been erroneous indications from service monitors that have not adequately warmed up. This is particularly likely when field service is done during winter months

* To find out how to launch the Windows-based software alignment and system-testing tool WinRIS, please refer to the readme.txt file on the applications installation diskette. For functional details of the numerous buttons and menu-selectable items available, please refer to the programs context sensitive help. It is also possible to access the help information via the F1 key. 122 20130-003 18 G3 Installation Guide Table 4 Test Checklist STEP ACTION TEST CHECKLIST EXPECTED RESULTS at 25C MEASURE WITH IF NOT?

G3 units are set and characterized at the factory to optimize performances. It is not recommended to try to readjust the units. 1 2 as per Table 1 - G3 LEDs indications as per WinRIS Help content Power-up LED Sequence Connect and save config Press WinRIS Get button 3 Main transceiver Output Power Press TX (Unmod) 4 Main transceiver Reflected Power Press TXON (Unmod) Carrier Frequency Error Press TX (Unmod) TX Deviation (in kHz) Press TXON (Modulated) Carrier will be modulated with a 1 kHz tone. RF Data Link test Use the base station address function and Send button to dynamically test the link 5 6 7 8 UHF: 40 watts 800MHz: 35 watts 900MHz: 25 watts all +10%, -10%;

Factory-settable down to 10 watts as per customer request Service monitor set to read power or 50W in-line watt-

meter Refer to factory technical support.

< 5% of forward power or as specified by System Eng. 10W in-line watt-

meter Check for bad connections, damaged coax cable, etc. 300 Hz Service monitor set to read fre-

quency error Refer to factory technical support. Refer to Table 5 for TX Deviation details Service monitor set to read deviation

(IF filter set to Mid or 30 kHz position) Refer to factory technical support. Look for Delivery confirmed on the WinRIS Status bar. Refer to section 4.3.3 and to Win-

RIS Help content. Check on the WinRIS RSSI bar graph if the base station is within range (i.e. better than -107dBm) Refer to factory technical or support. Set the service monitor to generate at the unit antenna jack the RF levels mentioned below. The carrier generated should be modulated with a 1.0 kHz tone at deviation as per step 4 above. 9 Main Rec. RSSI checks

-70dBm

-110dBm

-120dBm 10 Aux Receiver repeat as per step 9

- 70 dBm +/-3 typical

-110 dBm +/-3 typical

-120 dBm +/- 3 typical WinRIS bar graph same as step 9 above WinRIS bar graph The RSSI checks give a general indication of receivers' health Refer to factory technical support only if RX data per-

formance degradation is no-

ticed combined to out-of-

tolerance RSSI readings. 1 (unless you have set a lower value). Note that readings less than 40 watts (UHF model), 35 watts (800MHz model) and 25 watts (900MHz model) may be due to losses in cables used for testing. Check also your wattmeter frequency cali-

bration curve. Do not be too ready to condemn the transmitter. 122 20130-003 19 G3 Installation Guide Additional test details 4.3 4.3.1 TX Deviation G3 is per unit factory-calibrated. Deviation values listed below serve as reference only. Table 5 - TX Deviation TX Deviation Full Channel Units Special Channel Units Half Channel Units SRC8FSK 48.0kb/s 43.2kb/s SRC16FSK 64.0 kb/s 57.6 kb/s UHF 4.5 4.5 UHF 4.5 4.5 800 3.7 3.7 800 3.2 3.2 SRC8FSK 800 US

(NPSPAC) 900 US SRC8FSK 28.8kb/s 24.0kb/s 2.8 2.8 900 US SRC16FSK TBD 32.0kb/s 28.8kb/s TBD Tolerance is +5%, -10% for all bit rates. 2.9 2.9 800 US 3.2 3.2 24.0kb/s 21.6kb/s SRC16FSK 32.0kb/s 28.8kb/s UHF 2.2 2.2 UHF TBD TBD 800 2.2 2.2 800 2.0 2.2 4.3.2 GPS Test About three minutes after ignition is turned-on, the PWR LED on the G3 front panel should flash in amber color at the rate of one pulse per second.1 This indicates that the GPS has acquired the sky position of a sufficient number of satellites to arrive at a ground position solution. If the GPS has a good view of the sky and still has not generated any position solution within three minutes (it may take up to 10 minutes or more if the sky view is partially blocked.), the following trouble-shooting procedures should be undertaken to isolate the fault:

1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable connector from the Gemini radio and check for + 5 VDC on the center pin of the GPS antenna connector on the radio using a Digital voltmeter (DVM). If the voltage is present, do not reconnect the cable and proceed to step 2. 2) With the DVM, measure resistance between the shell and the center conductor of the GPS ca-

ble, resistance should be between 100 and 300 Ohms, if it measures open or short circuit the GPS antenna is either a passive antenna which is the WRONG type, or a defective active an-

tenna, replace with a known good active antenna. 3) Connect the new antenna to Gemini and wait about three minutes for the POSITION ACQUIRED indicator to start flashing on G3, if not, the Gemini radio or its GPS receiver is defective. 1 Lit green and flashing amber for the 800MHz & 900MHz models under transmitter duty cycle limit. 122 20130-003 20 G3 Installation Guide 4.3.3 RF Data Link Test A link test between a mobile and a known base station can be done using the WinRIS "Address"

and "Send" functions. The Address and Device fields, the Send button and the Chat message screen are used to send messages to specific mobile or base or to carry out RF test. Start by entering the address of the mobile (or base station) you wish to send a test message to or test:

1- Specify the address:

Addresses may be entered by typing directly in the Address field in two ways:

- Numerically, the valid address range is 1-126.

- As an Alpha-Mapped-Nibble (AMN) address, consisting of upper case letters in the range A-P. The valid address range is A to GN.

- The base address is usually: 1.

- The program may display one of the following messages on the status bar:

- For Paragon products:

address is not in AMN or number format

- For mobile products:

address is not in the range A GN In either case, check that the address entered is within the acceptable range, is of a valid for-

mat, and correctly typed. 2- Enter the Device number for mobile (or base station). 3- Press the Send button. The Chat window reports Sent to xx mobile (where xx is mobile name). If test is successful:

Status line reports Delivery confirmed. If test unsuccessful:

Chat window reports Waiting, Then the Status line reports Delivery Failed. 122 20130-003 21 G3 Installation Guide 5. Specifications GENERAL Frequency Channel spacing Frequency Control Frequency Stability Operating temperature Mode of Operation Number of channels Supply voltage Circuit Protection RX Current at 13.6 VDC TX Current at 13.6 VDC TX/RX separation Nominal Dimensions Weight:

RF input/output Impedance RF connector Interface connector RECEIVER Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Adjacent channel rejection

(Selectivity) Intermodulation rejection FM hum & noise ratio Spurious Response Rejection Conducted spurious TRANSMITTER Power output Duty cycle Conducted Spurious Frequency stability FM hum and noise ratio Attack time UHF 403 - 460MHz2, 450 - 512 MHz 800 MHz TX 806 - 824 MHz, RX 851 - 869 MHz 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz Digital Synthesizer / uController 1.5 ppm 900 MHz1 TX 896 - 902 MHz, RX 935 - 941 MHz

-30C to +60C (25C nominal) @ 95% non-cond. RH Half Duplex 16 internally stored, flash-EEPROM programmable 13.6Vdc nominal (negative ground) 10.9 16.3 VDC 15 Amp fuse external, Internal crowbar diode for reverse polarity protection

< 12 A any, 5 MHz typical

< 650 mA Standby (with GPS receiver)

< 12 A 45 MHz typical 7.1 D x 6.0 W x 2.0 H

< 4.5 lbs. 50 ohms nominal

< 10 A 39 MHz typical Main TX/RX: mini-UHF female Auxiliary RX: mini-UHF female GPS RX: SMA female (Not installed for G3 Lite version) 3x DE-9F D-subminiature 75 dB @ 25 kHz, 65 dB @ 12.5 kHz 63 dB @ 12.5 kHz

-116 dBm (< 0.35 V) *

>40 dB @ 12.5 kHz, >45 dB @ 25 kHz *

>40 dB @ 12.5 kHz *

75 dB

>80 dB

-57 dBm

* psophometrically weighted filter UHF = 10-40 watts 800 MHz = 10-35 watts 900 MHz = 10-25 watts 20% @ full power, 30 sec. max. TX time (subject to FCC MPE limit)

> -80 dBc 1.5 ppm

>40dB @ 1.5 kHz deviation, >45 dB @ 3.0 kHz deviation

< 10 ms 1 WARNING:

2 WARNING:

901 - 902 MHz is reserved for use outside US and Canada The frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons and should not be programmed into the unit. 122 20130-003 22 G3 Installation Guide Data rates and Modulation type Rx Sensitivity for 1%

Packet Error Rate with Parallel Decode, at carrier frequency SRRC8FSK (21600 b/s, 24000 b/s, 43200 b/s);

SRRC16FSK (21600 b/s, 24000 b/s, 57600 b/s, 64000 b/s );

UHF

(Full channel) TBD@64kbps TBD@57.6kbps UHF

(Half channel) 800 MHz

(full channel) TBD@64kbps TBD@57.6kbps 800 MHz & 900 MHz

(NPSPAC channel) 106 dBm @ 43.2 kb/s 110 dBm @ 21.6 kb/s 106 dBm @ 43.2 kb/s 110 dBm @ 24 kb/s Dataradio Proprietary E-DBA with OOB AAVL support Protocol DISPLAY and CONTROLS 2 status LEDs Environmental MIL. spec. Environment Low Pressure High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Shock Solar Radiation Rain Humidity Dust Vibration Shock RX/TX, PWR Categories MIL Spec. 810E Other Operations Operations, Storage Operations, Storage Transfer of equipment Heat effects Drip rain Induced, Aggravated Blowing dust Ground Mobile Functional, Bench handling Method 500.3 501.3 502.3 503.3 505.3 506.3 507.3 510.3 514.4 516.4 Procedure II I(A1), II I(C3), II (C1) I(AI,C2) I II II,III I I(8) I,VI

**TBD** IEC IP54 only II

**TBD**

**TBD** IEC IP54 EIA RS-204C Forestry EIA RS-204C 800MHz

(FCC Mask) 15K0F1D (G)

*15K0F1D (G) 8K60F1D (H)

*8K60F1D (H) 14K4F1D(G) 14K1F1D(G) 14K7F1D (G) 15K6F1D (G) 7K92F1D(D) 10K5F1D(H) 8K42F1D(D) 11K0F1D(H) 15K6F1D (G) 11K0F1D (H) 8K17F1D(D) 8K42F1D(D) 10K2F1D (H) 10K0F1D (H)

900MHz

(FCC Mask)

10K2F1D (J) 8K75F1D (J)

11K4F1D (J)

9K92F1D (J) 10K7F1D (J)

FCC / IC CERTIFICATIONS Band FCC IC (DOC) EMISSION DESIGNATORS Bit rate Modulation UHF EOTGPDA 773195525A 800 900 EOTGPDB 773195643A EOTGPD9 773A-GPD9 19200 9600 9600 8000 64000 57600 43200 32000 32000 Baud rate 19200 9600 9600 8000 DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK DGMSK 16000 14400 14400 16000 8000 SRRC16FSK SRRC16FSK SRRC8FSK RC4FSK SRRC16FSK UHF

(FCC Mask) 15K0F1D (C)

*15K0F1D (C) 8K60F1D (D)

*8K60F1D (D) 16K4F1D(C) 16K9F1D(C) 16K4F1D (C) 16K5F1D (C) 28800 7200 SRRC16FSK 25600 24000 21600 19200 16000 14400 12800 8000 SRRC4FSK SRRC8FSK 15K6F1D (C)

7200 9600 8000 7200 SRRC8FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK SRRC4FSK 9K67F1D (D)

8K17F1D (D) 8K67F1D (D) 122 20130-003 23 G3 Installation Guide

* Under class 1 permissive change